Toyota TACOMA_OM_OM04005U 2016 Tacoma Owners Manual Pdf OM04005U

User Manual: Toyota 2016 Toyota Tacoma Owners Manual Pdf 2016 Toyota Tacoma Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 640 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Pictorial index Search by illustration
1For safety
and security Make sure to read through them
2Instrument
cluster
How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.
3
Operation of
each
component
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.
4Driving Operations and advices which are necessary for
driving
5Multimedia Operating the multimedia system
6Interior features Usage of the interior features, etc.
7Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance
procedures
8When trouble
arises What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
9Vehicle
specifications Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.
10 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat
belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian
owners
Index Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
For your information....................... 8
Reading this manual.................... 12
How to search.............................. 13
Pictorial index .............................. 14
1-1. For safe use
Before driving...................... 24
For safety drive ................... 26
Seat belts ............................ 28
SRS airbags........................ 34
Front passenger occupant
classification system ......... 45
Safety information
for children ........................ 50
Child restraint systems........ 51
Installing child restraints...... 55
Exhaust gas precautions..... 68
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system............................... 69
Alarm................................... 78
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators........................... 82
Gauges and meters............. 88
Multi-information display ..... 93
Fuel consumption
information ........................ 98
3-1. Key information
Keys...................................102
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Doors.................................109
Tailgate..............................116
Smart key system..............121
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats.........................129
Rear seats .........................131
Head restraints ..................134
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel...................138
Inside rear view mirror.......140
Outside rear view
mirrors .............................143
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows..................145
Back window (vehicles
with sliding type)..............148
Moon roof ..........................149
1For safety and security
2Instrument cluster
3Operation of
each component
3
1
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
10
6
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle............. 154
Cargo and luggage............ 163
Vehicle load limits ............. 167
Trailer towing..................... 168
Dinghy towing.................... 186
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without
a smart key system)........ 187
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a smart
key system)..................... 190
Automatic transmission..... 195
Manual transmission ......... 199
Turn signal lever................ 201
Parking brake.................... 202
4-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch ................ 203
Fog light switch ................. 207
Windshield wipers and
washer ............................ 208
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap .................................. 211
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Cruise control ....................215
Intuitive parking assist .......220
Rear view monitor
system .............................226
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor).........236
• The Blind Spot Monitor
function..........................238
• The Rear Cross Traffic
Alert function .................241
Four-wheel drive system ...244
AUTO LSD system ............248
Rear differential lock
system .............................250
Active traction control
system .............................253
Multi-terrain Select.............255
Crawl Control.....................259
Clutch start cancel
switch ..............................263
Driving assist systems .......264
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips..............270
Off-road precautions..........273
4Driving
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4
5-1. Basic Operations
Audio system types........... 280
Audio system..................... 282
Steering wheel audio
switches .......................... 284
USB Port/AUX Port ........... 285
Basic audio operations...... 286
5-2. Setup
Setup menu....................... 288
General settings................ 289
Audio settings.................... 291
Display settings................. 292
Voice settings.................... 293
5-3. Using the multimedia system
Selecting the audio
source ............................. 294
List screen operation......... 295
Optimal use of the
multimedia system .......... 297
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation................. 298
5-5. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation .......... 300
5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod........... 305
Listening to a USB
memory device................ 309
Using the AUX port ........... 313
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Preparations to use
wireless
communication ................314
Registering a Bluetooth®
audio player
for the first time................320
Registering a Bluetooth®
phone for the first time ....321
Registering a Bluetooth®
device ..............................322
Connecting a Bluetooth®
device ..............................324
Displaying a Bluetooth®
device details...................326
Detailed Bluetooth®
system settings................327
5-8. Bluetooth® audio
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio................................328
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Using a Bluetooth®
phone ..............................329
Making a call......................331
Receiving a call .................334
Speaking on the phone......335
Bluetooth® phone
message function ............338
Using the steering
wheel switches ................342
Bluetooth® phone
settings ............................343
Contact/Call History
Settings ...........................345
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ............354
5-10.Bluetooth®
Bluetooth®.........................358
5-11.Using the voice
command system
Voice command system ....363
5Multimedia
5
1
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
10
6
6-1. Using the air conditioning
system
Manual air conditioning
system............................. 370
Automatic air conditioning
system............................. 376
Seat heaters...................... 383
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................ 385
• Interior light ................... 386
• Front personal lights ..... 386
• Cargo lamp main
switch............................ 387
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features...... 388
• Glove box...................... 389
• Front console box ......... 390
• Overhead console......... 390
• Cup holders .................. 391
• Bottle holders................ 392
• Storage box .................. 393
Luggage compartment
features ........................... 396
6-4. Other interior features
Other interior features ....... 406
• Sun visors ..................... 406
• Vanity mirrors................ 406
• Clock............................. 407
• Power outlets
(12 V DC)...................... 408
• Power outlet
(120 V AC) .................... 409
• Wireless charger........... 414
• Assist grips ................... 419
• Camera mounting
bracket .......................... 420
Garage door opener.......... 421
Compass........................... 428
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ..........434
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ...........437
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements ...................440
General maintenance ........442
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs .........................445
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions......................446
Hood..................................448
Engine compartment .........450
Tires...................................462
Tire inflation pressure........472
Wheels...............................475
Air conditioning filter ..........478
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery ......481
Checking and replacing
fuses................................484
Light bulbs .........................487
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...........500
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in
an emergency..................501
6Interior features 7Maintenance and care
8When trouble arises
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
8-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ......................... 503
If you think something is
wrong .............................. 508
Fuel pump shut off
system............................. 509
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds ............................ 510
If a warning message is
displayed (vehicles with
a multi-information
display)............................ 519
If you have a flat tire.......... 536
If the engine will not
start ................................. 551
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P (vehicles
with an automatic
transmission)................... 553
If the electronic key
does not operate properly
(vehicles with a smart
key system) .................... 555
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ...................... 557
If your vehicle overheats ... 561
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................ 563
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ..........566
Fuel information.................579
Tire information..................582
9-2. Customization
Customizable features.......592
9-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize................599
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ........................602
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)................................603
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)...............................605
Camper information....................613
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting).....................620
Alphabetical index......................624
9Vehicle specifications
10 For owners
Index
For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer
to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL” for information regarding the multimedia system.
Audio system types: P. 280
7
1
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
10
6
8
For your information
Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, includ-
ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and it does not indicate a malfunction.
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehi-
cles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance,
repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modi-
fication with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety
or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be
covered under warranty.
Main Owner’s Manual
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
9
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
●Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
●Cruise control system (if equipped)
●Anti-lock brake system
●SRS airbag system
●Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or spe-
cial instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record
certain data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options
with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record con-
versations, sounds or pictures.
●Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunc-
tions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
Vehicle data recordings
10
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-
ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
●Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except
when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehi-
cle) is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Event data recorder
11
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer
before you scrap your vehicle.
Special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo-
nents may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con-
trol batteries.
Scrapping of your Toyota
Perchlorate Material
WARNING
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that
distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition,
heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal
to children.
12
Reading this manual
WARNING:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or
serious injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to
or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps
in numerical order.
Indicates the action (push-
ing, turning, etc.) used to
operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the component or
position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do
this”, or “Do not let this hap-
pen”.
123
13
How to search
■Searching by name
• Alphabetical index.......P. 624
■Searching by installation
position
• Pictorial index................P. 14
■Searching by symptom or
sound
• What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ........P. 620
■Searching by title
• Table of contents.............P. 2
14 Pictorial index
Pictorial index
■Exterior
The illustration represents the Double Cab models and may differ from the
body shape of other models.
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 109
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 109
Opening/closing the door windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 145
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key*1. . . . . . . . . . P. 555
Warning lights/warning messages*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 512, 524
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 116
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 116
Opening/closing the tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 116
Removing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 117
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
Folding the mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 372, 379
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 208
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 270
Back window (vehicles with sliding type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 148
5 3 12 4102149
181115 17 18 7 113816 6
STYPIBD001
1
2
3
4
5
15
Pictorial index
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211
Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 570
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 462
Tire size/inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 577
Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 270
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system*3 . . . . . . . . . P. 462
Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 536
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 448
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 448
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 571
Coping with overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 561
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 226
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 203
Fog lights*3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 207
Front turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Parking lights (bulb type)*3/
daytime running lights (bulb type)*3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 203
Parking lights (LED type)*3/
daytime running lights (LED type)*3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 203
Rear turn signal/tail lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Stop/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 203
Hill-start assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 265
License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 203
Back-up lights
Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 195, 199
Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 203
6
7
8
9
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 487, Watts: P. 578)
*1: Vehicles with a smart key system
*2: Vehicles with a multi-information display
*3: If equipped
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
16 Pictorial index
■Instrument panel
Engine switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 187, 190
Starting the engine/changing the positions*1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 187
Starting the engine/changing the modes*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 191
Emergency stop of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 501
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 551
Warning message*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 530
Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 195, 199
Changing the shift position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 195, 199
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 503
When the shift lever does not move*3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 553
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 88
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light. . . . . . P. 88
Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 82
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 510
Multi-information display*4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 93
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 93
When the warning message or indicator is displayed . . . . . . . P. 519
41136 7
258 9 1 1 10
STYPIBD002
1
2
3
4
17
Pictorial index
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 271
Warning light/warning buzzer/warning message*5 . . . . . P. 512, 525
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 203
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights. . . . P. 203
Fog lights*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 207
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 208
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 208
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 461
Warning light/messages*6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 513, 523
Hood lock release lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 448
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . P. 138
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 370, 376
Usage (manual type)*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 370
Usage (automatic type)*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 376
Entune Audio system*7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 280
*1: Vehicles without a smart key system
*2: Vehicles with a smart key system
*3: Vehicles with an automatic transmission
*4: If equipped
*5: Vehicles with a multi-information display
*6: For Canada only
*7: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
18 Pictorial index
■Switches
Cargo lamp main switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 387
Power outlet main switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 409
“CLUTCH START CANCEL” switch*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 263
Outside rear view mirror switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
Window lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 145
Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 111
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 145
Tire pressure warning reset switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 464
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
19
Pictorial index
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 500
Front-wheel drive control switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 244
Power mode switch*3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 196
Wireless charger switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 414
AUX port/USB port*4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 285
BSM main switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 236
Intuitive parking assist switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 220
ECT
PWR
ECT
PWR
1
45736
3 4 5
2
STYPIBD004
Type A
Type B
*1: If equipped
*2: Vehicles with a manual transmission
*3: Vehicles with an automatic transmission
*4: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
20 Pictorial index
Audio remote control switches*1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 284
Talk switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 363
Telephone switches*1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 342
Meter control switches*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 94
Cruise control switch*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 215
2 4
53
1
STYPIBD005
1
2
3
4
5
21
Pictorial index
■Interior
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 34
Floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 24
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 129
Rear seats*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 131
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 134
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 28
Front console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 390
Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 111
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 391
Bottle holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 392
10 106 185 5
7 294 3
STYPIBD006
*1: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
*2: If equipped
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
22 Pictorial index
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 140
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 406
Vanity mirrors*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 406
Front personal lights/interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 386
VSC off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 248, 265, 266
Active traction control switch*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 253
Rear differential lock switch*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 250
Moon roof switches*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 149
Multi-terrain Select/Crawl Control switches* . . . . . . . P. 255, 259
Garage door opener switches* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 421
*: If equipped
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
23
For safety and security 1
1-1. For safe use
Before driving...................... 24
For safety drive ................... 26
Seat belts ............................ 28
SRS airbags........................ 34
Front passenger occupant
classification system ......... 45
Safety information
for children ........................ 50
Child restraint systems........ 51
Installing child restraints...... 55
Exhaust gas precautions..... 68
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system .............................. 69
Alarm................................... 78
24 1-1. For safe use
Before driving
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.
Floor mat
1
2
25
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■When installing the driver’s floor mat
●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
●Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■Before driving
●Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
●With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N
(manual transmission), fully depress
each pedal to the floor to make sure it
does not interfere with the floor mat.
26 1-1. For safe use
For safety drive
Adjust the angle of the seat-
back so that you are sitting
straight up and so that you do
not have to lean forward to
steer. (P. 129)
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so
that your arms bend slightly at
the elbow when gripping the
steering wheel. (P. 129, 138)
Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint
closest to the top of your ears. (P. 134)
Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 2 8)
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle. (P. 2 8)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
(P. 51)
Make sure that you can see rearward of the vehicle clearly, by adjust-
ing the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. (P. 140, 143)
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate
position before driving.
Correct driving posture
1
2
Correct use of the seat belts
Adjusting the mirrors
3
4
27
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
●When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to
feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to con-
tinue driving and take a break immediately.
28 1-1. For safe use
Seat belts
●Extend the shoulder belt so that
it comes fully over the shoulder,
but does not come into contact
with the neck or slide off the
shoulder.
●Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the seat-
back. Sit up straight and well
back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
To fasten the seat belt, push the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
To release the seat belt, press
the release button.
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before
driving the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
1
2
29
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing the
release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
The pretensioners help the seat
belts to quickly restrain the occu-
pants by retracting the seat belts
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal or
side collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a minor side impact or a
rear impact.
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
1
2
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
30 1-1. For safe use
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This
feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt
again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 55)
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 51)
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (P. 28)
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for
the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt extender
is available from your Toyota dealer free
of charge.
31
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
●Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■Pregnant women
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 28)
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 28)
Women who are pregnant should posi-
tion the lap belt as low as possible over
the hips in the same manner as other
occupants, extending the shoulder belt
completely over the shoulder and avoid-
ing belt contact with the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
32 1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
■Adjustable shoulder anchor (front seats)
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or an accident. (P. 29)
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
33
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
34 1-1. For safe use
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce
the risk of death or serious injury.
35
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
◆SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and right front
passenger from impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
◆SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags
●Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats
●Can prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in
the event of vehicle rollover
1
2
3
4
36 1-1. For safe use
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag
sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on infor-
mation obtained from the sensors, etc., shown in the system compo-
nents diagram above. This information includes crash severity and
occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain
the motion of the occupants.
SRS airbag system components
Seat belt pretensioners
Knee airbags
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
Side airbags (front seats)
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat position sensor
Side impact sensors (rear)
Side impact sensors (front)
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Front impact sensors
Airbag sensor assembly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
37
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from
the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10
in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the ped-
als comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250
mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by
reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your
seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-
slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckles but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the seat
belt, the SRS front airbags will judge
that the driver and front passenger are
wearing the seat belt even though the
seat belt has not been connected. In
this case, the SRS front airbags may
not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.
38 1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 51)
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
●Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
39
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of
these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious
injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
●If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,
be sure to remove it.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seats toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
●Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags deploy.
●Do not attach anything to areas such as
a door, windshield, side windows, front
or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist
grip.
●Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard
objects such as keys and accessories
to the key. The objects may restrict the
SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust
into the driver’s seat area by the force
of the deploying airbag, thus causing a
danger.
40 1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front
airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
●Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows,
winches or roof luggage carrier
●Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
41
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Slight abrasions, burns, bruising, etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags,
due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side rails,
may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●The windshield may crack.
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the
set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately
12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not
move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following
situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which
can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
●Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pre-
tensioners will activate.
●The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front air-
bags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if
the seat is unoccupied.
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding
to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle
colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle
orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
●The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a
severe frontal collision.
42 1-1. For safe use
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than
a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also
deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some
examples are shown in the illustration.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situation shown in
the illustration.
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air-
bags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward
deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or vehicle falling
●The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
●The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
43
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is
subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the
side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-
speed frontal collision.
The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a
low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
●Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compart-
ment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
●Collision from the rear
●Pitching end over end
44 1-1. For safe use
■When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.
●A portion of a door or its surrounding
area is damaged or deformed, or the
vehicle was involved in an accident that
was not severe enough to cause the
SRS side and curtain shield airbags to
inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger air-
bag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
●The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
●The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
45
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Front passenger occupant classification
system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classi-
fication system. This system detects the conditions of the front
passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the
front passenger.
Seat belt reminder light
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
1
2
3
4
46 1-1. For safe use
■Adult*1
■Child*4 or child restraint system*5
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classi-
fication system
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights “AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Off*2
or
flashing*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”*6
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Off*2
or
flashing*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger knee airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
47
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
■Unoccupied
■There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights Not illuminated
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger knee airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Deactivated*7
or
activated*8
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light On
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger knee airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
48 1-1. For safe use
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt
*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*4: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the
front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult
depending on his/her physique or posture.
*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on
the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 51)
*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how
to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 55)
*7: In the event of a frontal collision or rollover.
*8: In the event of a side collision.
WARNING
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the right front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from
the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt
extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated.
If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate,
which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pockets).
●Vehicles with rear seats: Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by
putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the
rear passenger seat.
●Vehicles with rear seats: Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passen-
ger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
49
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat or a back wall. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to
be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passen-
ger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback
touches the rear seat or back wall, return the seatback to a position where
it does not touch the rear seat or back wall. Keep the front passenger seat-
back as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the
seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt sys-
tem.
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat in the proper order. (P. 55)
●Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your
Toyota dealer immediately.
●Vehicles with rear seats: Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat
should not contact the front seatbacks.
●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that cov-
ers the seat cushion surface.
●Do not attach a commercial seatback table or other heavy item to the back
of the front passenger seat.
●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
50 1-1. For safe use
Safety information for children
●Vehicles with rear seats: It is recommended that children sit in the
rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper
switch, etc.
●Use the rear door child-protector lock (Double Cab models only) or
the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while
driving or operating the power window accidentally.
●Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or
pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, tailgate, seats,
etc.
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehi-
cle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the
child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
51
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Child restraint systems
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appro-
priate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 55)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be
properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/
shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require
the use of child restraint systems.
Points to remember
52 1-1. For safe use
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child:
■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
●If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat
and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 28)
Types of child restraints
Rear facing Infant seat/con-
vertible seat
Forward facing Convertible
seat
Booster seat
53
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
●Vehicles without rear seats: Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child
restraint system that conforms to the size of the child.
●Vehicles with rear seats: Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child
restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear
seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-fac-
ing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
●Vehicles without rear seats: A forward-facing child restraint system may be
installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Adjust
the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed
and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
●Vehicles with rear seats: A forward-facing child restraint system may be
installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child
restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front
passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always
move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seri-
ously injured.
54 1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■Child restraint precautions
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of an accident.
●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy
even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact
could cause death or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the pas-
senger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sud-
den stop or an accident.
55
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Installing child restraints
Access Cab models (vehicles with rear seats)
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for
each of rear seats.
Double Cab models
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for
the outer rear seats. (Buttons dis-
playing the location of the anchors
are attached to the seats.)
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions.
Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH
anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing
a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system
is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children) system.
Using the LATCH anchors (P. 5 8 , 5 9 )
56 1-1. For safe use
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s
seat belt) (P. 30)
Access Cab models (vehicles without rear seats)
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor bracket is provided for pas-
senger seat.
Using the seat belts (P. 6 0)
Using the top tether strap (P. 63, 65)
57
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Access Cab models (vehicles with rear seats)
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor bracket is provided for
each rear seat.
Double Cab models
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor bracket is provided for
each rear seat.
58 1-1. For safe use
Type A
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors. If
the child restraint has a top tether
strap, the top tether strap should
be latched onto the top tether
strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a lower
connector system.
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the LATCH
anchors. If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top tether
strap should be latched onto the
top tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a lower
connector system.
Installation with LATCH system (Access Cab models [vehicles
with rear seats])
59
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Type A
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH
anchors. If the child restraint
has a top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be latched
onto the top tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Type B
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Installation with LATCH system (Double Cab models)
1
2
1
2
60 1-1. For safe use
■Rear-facing (vehicles without rear seats) Infant seat/con-
vertible seat
Never install a rear-facing child restrain. Your vehicle is not
designed to carry and infant.
■Rear-facing (vehicles with rear seats) Infant seat/convertible
seat
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
rear of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock
function belt)
1
2
3
61
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
While pushing the child
restraint system down into
the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there
is no slack in the belt, pull the
belt to check that it cannot be
extended.
■Forward-facing Convertible seat
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.
4
1
2
3
62 1-1. For safe use
While pushing the child
restraint system into the rear
seat, allow the shoulder belt
to retract until the child
restraint system is securely
in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there
is no slack in the belt, pull the
belt to check that it cannot be
extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 63, 65)
■Booster seat
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
Sit the child in the child
restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint sys-
tem according to the manu-
facturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 28)
4
5
1
2
63
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Vehicles without rear seats
Remove the head restraint.
Remove the anchor bracket
cover.
Store the removed cover in a safe
place such as the glove box.
Secure the child restraint system using a seat belt.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top
tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (Access Cab mod-
els)
1
2
3
4
64 1-1. For safe use
Replace the head restraint.
Vehicles with rear seats
Remove the anchor bracket
covers.
Store the removed covers in a safe
place such as the glove box.
Secure the child restraint system using the seat belt or the lower
anchors.
Route the top tether strap
through the routing device as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the top tether strap is
not twisted.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top
tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
5
1
2
3
4
65
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
Remove the head restraint.
Installing position:
Outer rear seat
Center rear seat
Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket.
Swing the seatback forward slightly. (P. 131)
Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket.
Return the seatback.
Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing it forward and rear-
ward on the top.
Secure the child restraint system using the seat belt or the lower
anchors, ant tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.
Replace the head restraint.
Installing position:
Outer rear seat
Center rear seat
If the head restraint interferes with
the top tether strap installation and
the head restraint can be removed
and stored the storage box.
(P. 393, 405)
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (Double Cab mod-
els)
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
Outer rear seat Center rear seat
3
4
1
2
66 1-1. For safe use
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-
tions can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
WARNING
■When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 30)
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden
braking or an accident.
●Vehicles with rear seats: If the driver’s
seat interferes with the child restraint
system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child
restraint system to the right-hand rear
seat.
●Vehicles with rear seats: Adjust the front
passenger seat so that it does not inter-
fere with the child restraint system.
●Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoid-
able. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat, move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious
injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
67
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■When installing a child restraint system
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of an accident or a sudden braking.
●Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
●Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
●Double Cab models only: When securing some types of child restraint sys-
tems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in
positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting
seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your
shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child
restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death
or serious injury.
●Double Cab models only: When installing the child restraint system with
the head restraint being lowered, be sure to have the top tether strap pass
over the top of the head restraint. If the belt passes below the head
restraint, it is possible that the child restraint system may not be securely
fixed.
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors (vehicles
with rear seats)
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,
or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in
the event of a sudden braking or an accident.
68 1-1. For safe use
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust
gases if inhale.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases to enter the vehicle and may lead
to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
■Important points while driving
●Vehicles with a sliding type back window: Keep the back window closed.
●If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back window
(vehicles with a sliding type) is closed, open the windows and have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
●Toyota does not recommend occupying the rear cargo area when it is fitted
with a slide-in camper, camper shell or other type cover while the engine is
running. This caution applies to both driving and stopped, or parked situa-
tions with the engine running. Particular care should be taken to prevent
exhaust gases from entering camper bodies, trailers or other enclosures
on or around your vehicle. If exhaust fumes are detected, open all win-
dows and thoroughly ventilate the area.
■When parking
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a
garage, stop the engine.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
■Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
69
1-2. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
Engine immobilizer system
Vehicles without a smart key sys-
tem:
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed from
the engine switch to indicate that
the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the registered key has been
inserted into the engine switch to
indicate that the system has been
canceled.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned off
to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the engine switch has been
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
: If equipped
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent
the engine from starting if a key has not been previously regis-
tered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehi-
cle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does
not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
70 1-2. Theft deterrent system
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and New Caledonia
FCC ID: MOZRI-42BTY
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
FCC ID: NI4TMLF12-1
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le presént appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
71
1-2. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
For vehicles sold in New Caledonia
72 1-2. Theft deterrent system
73
1-2. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
74 1-2. Theft deterrent system
75
1-2. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
76 1-2. Theft deterrent system
77
1-2. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
78 1-2. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
●A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using
the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The
doors will lock again automatically.)
●The hood is opened.
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors. The system will
be set automatically after 30 sec-
onds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the sys-
tem is set.
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
●Unlock the doors.
●Vehicles without a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position, or start the
engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few sec-
onds.)
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or
start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
: If equipped
The alarm
Setting the alarm system
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
79
1-2. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of
the following:
●Nobody is in the vehicle.
●The windows and moon roof (if equipped) are closed before the alarm is set.
●No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
●A person inside the vehicle opens a door
or hood, or unlocks the vehicle using an
inside lock button.
●The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked.
80 1-2. Theft deterrent system
■Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically
lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
●When a person remaining in the vehicle locks the door and the alarm is acti-
vated.
●While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the
door.
●When recharging or replacing the battery.
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
81
Instrument cluster 2
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators .......................... 82
Gauges and meters ............ 88
Multi-information display ..... 93
Fuel consumption
information ........................ 98
82 2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
Vehicles without a multi-information display
Vehicles with a multi-information display
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and
center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s vari-
ous systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration dis-
plays all warning lights and indicators illuminated.
83
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehi-
cle’s systems.
Warning lights
*1
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning
light (P. 510)
*1
(Canada)
ABS warning light
(P. 511)
*1
(Canada)
Brake system warning
light (P. 510)
*1, 3
Slip indicator (P. 511)
*1, 2
Charging system warn-
ing light (P. 510)
*2
(Yellow)
(If equipped)
Cruise control indicator
light (P. 511)
*1, 2
Low engine oil pressure
warning light (P. 510)
*1, 2, 4 Automatic transmission
fluid temperature warn-
ing light (P. 511)
*1
(U.S.A.)
Malfunction indicator
lamp (P. 510)
*2
(Flashes
in yellow)
(4WD models)
Four-wheel drive indica-
tor (P. 512)
*1
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator
lamp (P. 510)
*5
(Flashes
rapidly)
(If equipped)
Rear differential lock
indicator (P. 512)
*1
SRS warning light
(P. 510)
*6
(Flashes)
(4WD models)
Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator (P. 512)
*1
(U.S.A.)
ABS warning light
(P. 511)
*2
Open door warning light
(P. 512)
84 2. Instrument cluster
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position
(vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles
with a smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds.
There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or if
the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
for details.
*2: Vehicles without a multi-information display.
*3: The light comes on to indicate a malfunction.
*4: Vehicles with an automatic transmission.
*5: Vehicles with a multi-information display.
*6: Vehicles without a multi-information display:
The light flashes rapidly in yellow to indicate a malfunction.
Vehicles with a multi-information display:
The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
*7: 2GR-FKS engine only
Low fuel level warning
light (P. 512)
*1, 2
Brake Override System
warning light (P. 513)
Seat belt reminder light
(P. 512)
*1
(If equipped)
Tire pressure warning
light (P. 513)
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 512)
*1, 2
(Canada)
Low windshield washer
fluid warning light
(P. 513)
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 512)
*2, 7 Low engine oil level
warning light (P. 514)
*1, 5
Master warning light
(P. 513)
*1, 2
(U.S.A.)
Maintenance required
remainder light
(P. 514)
*1, 2
(If equipped)
BSM (Blind Spot Moni-
tor) warning light
(P. 513)
85
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s
various systems.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator
(P. 201)
*3
VSC off indicator
(P. 248, 265, 266)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 203)
*3
“TRAC OFF” indicator
(P. 265, 266)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 203)
*5
(If equipped)
Active traction control
system indicator
(P. 253)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 205)
(Green)
(4WD models)
Four-wheel drive indica-
tor (P. 244)
(If equipped)
Fog light indicator
(P. 207)
*3
(If equipped)
Rear differential lock
indicator (P. 250)
*1
Power mode indicator
(P. 196)
*5
(If equipped)
Multi-terrain Select indi-
cator (P. 255)
*2
(Green)
(If equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 215)
*5
(If equipped)
Crawl Control indicator
(P. 259)
*2
(If equipped)
Cruise control “SET”
indicator (P. 215)
*3
“AUTO LSD” indicator
(P. 248)
*3, 4
Slip indicator
(P. 248, 253, 259, 265)
(4WD models)
Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator (P. 244)
86 2. Instrument cluster
*1: Vehicles with an automatic transmission.
*2: For vehicles with a multi-information display, this light illuminates on the
multi-information display.
*3: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position
(vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles
with a smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds.
There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or if
the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
for details.
*4: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*5: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
*6: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the
indicator will flash for 10 times, then comes on.
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 202)
*7, 8
(If equipped)
BSM outside rear view
mirror indicator
(P. 236)
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 202)
*9
(If equipped)
Security indicator
(P. 69, 78)
*2, 6
Low outside tempera-
ture indicator (P. 88)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicators
(P. 45)
*3, 9
87
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
*7: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators
illuminate in the following situations:
• When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key
system) while the BSM main switch is set to ON.
• When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the engine switch is in the
“ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indi-
cators will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not
turn off, there may be a malfunction in the system.
*8: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
*9: This light illuminates on the center panel.
WARNING
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not
come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death
or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately if this occurs.
88 2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Vehicles without a multi-information display
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Shift position and shift range (vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion)
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range. (P. 195)
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to
122°F (50°C). Outside temperature blinks 10 times when temperature is
below 37°F (3°C)
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Odometer/trip meter
P. 9 0
“ODO/TRIP” and instrument panel light control button
P. 9 0
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
89
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Vehicles with a multi-information display
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to
122°F (50°C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the
ambient temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data. (P. 94)
Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction. (P. 519)
Odometer/trip meter
P. 9 0
Shift position and shift range (vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion)
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range. (P. 195)
“ODO/TRIP” and instrument panel light control button
P. 9 0
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
90 2. Instrument cluster
Vehicles without a multi-informa-
tion display:
Pressing the button switches
between trip meter A and trip
meter B.
Vehicles with a multi-information
display:
Pressing the button switches
between odometer and trip meter.
■Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
■Trip meter A*/trip meter B*
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter
was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and dis-
play different distances independently.
*: Press and hold the button to reset.
■Blank displays
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turn-
ing the button.
Darker
Brighter
Changing the odometer and trip meter display
Instrument panel light control
1
2
91
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■The multi-information display illuminate when (if equipped)
Vehicles without a smart key system:
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■The brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the tail lights are turned on, the display’s brightness will be reduced
slightly unless the meter brightness level adjustment is set to the brightest
setting.
■Outside temperature display
●In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
●When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
■Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to
use the display.
92 2. Instrument cluster
WARNING
■The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear
number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to down-
shift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an
accident resulting in personal death or injury.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
●The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 561)
93
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of vehi-
cle data.
●Menu icons
Displays the following informa-
tion when an icon is selected.
(P. 94)
Some of the information may be
displayed automatically
depending on the situation.
Drive information
Select to display various drive data. (P. 94)
Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
• Route guidance
• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)
Audio system-linked display
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter
using the meter control switches.
Vehicle information (if equipped)
Select to display various vehicle information. (P. 95)
Warning message display
Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a
malfunction is detected. (P. 519)
Settings display
Select to change the meter display settings. (P. 95)
: If equipped
Display contents
94 2. Instrument cluster
■Operating the meter control switches
Select an item/change pages
Press: Enters/Sets
Press and hold: Resets
Switch menu/Displays the
top screen
Returns to the previous
screen
●Average fuel economy*1, 2/Tank average fuel economy*1/Trip aver-
age fuel economy*1
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was
reset, the vehicle was refueled, and the engine was started, respec-
tively
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
●Distance to empty*1
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with
the quantity of fuel remaining, the distance driven after the engine
was started and the distance since the function was reset, respec-
tively.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As
a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that dis-
played.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled with-
out turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.
●Current fuel economy*1
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
●Trip elapsed time*1/Elapsed time*1, 2
Displays the engine was started and the elapsed time since the
function was reset, respectively
●Trip average speed*1/Average speed*1, 2
Displays the engine was started and the average vehicle speed
since the function was reset, respectively
1
2
3
4
Drive information
95
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
●Trip distance*1/Distance*1, 2
Displays the engine was started and the distance since the function
was reset, respectively
●Digital speedometer*1
●Display off*1
A blank screen is displayed
*1: Can be registered to Drive information 1 through 3.
*2: Resetting procedures:
• Select a function to be reset using the meter control switch and then
press and hold the center button to reset.
• If there is more than one function that can be reset, check boxes will be
displayed next to the functions.
●Clinometer (if equipped)
Displays the longitudinal and lateral inclination of the vehicle.
●Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
P. 2 20
●Multi-terrain select (if equipped)
P. 2 55
●Crawl control (if equipped)
P. 2 59
●Tire inflation pressure (if equipped)
P. 4 63
■Changing the settings
Select using the meter control switch.
Select an item and then set it with the center button.
Vehicle information
Settings display
1
2
96 2. Instrument cluster
■Customizable items
●Language
Select to change the language on the display.
●Units
Select to change the unit of measure for fuel consumption and
temperature.
●Drive information 1 through 3
Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on a Drive
information screen, up to 3 Drive information screens can be set.
●Pop-up display
Select to set the following pop-up displays, which may appear in
some situations, on/off.
• Instrument panel brightness adjustment display
• Route guidance display of the navigation system-linked sys-
tem (if equipped)
• Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system
• Shift position display (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
●Accent color
Select to change the accent colors on the screen, such as the
cursor color.
●Speed limit display*
Select to set the display of speed limit information stored in the
navigation system (if equipped) to on with the speed limit caution
indicator (yellow) enabled, on with the speed limit caution not
enabled, or off. If enabled, the speed limit caution indicator will
come on if the vehicle speed exceeds the displayed speed limit.
●Programming
It is possible to set up a screen desired to be displayed as the
Top Screen by pressing and holding .
There are also screens that cannot be setup as the Top Screen.
●Maintenance system (U.S.A.)
Select to reset the message after the required maintenance is
performed. (P. 441)
●Default settings
Registered or changed meter settings will be deleted or returned
to their default setting.
*: Speed limit display may not be available for some regions.
97
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■Setting display automatic cancelation
In the following situations, a setting display in which the settings can be
changed through the meter control switches will automatically be turned off.
●When a warning message appears while the setting display is displayed
●When the vehicle begins to move while the setting display is displayed
■Tire inflation pressure (vehicles with tire pressure warning system)
●It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key
system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system). It may
also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation
pressure has been adjusted.
●“---” may be displayed if the tire position information cannot be determined
due to unfavorable radio wave conditions.
●Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may
also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.
■Liquid crystal display
P. 9 1
WARNING
■The information display at low temperatures
P. 9 2
■Cautions during setting up the display
As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that
the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area
such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO)
may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
NOTICE
■During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting
up the display features.
98 2. Instrument cluster
Fuel consumption information
Press the “APPS” button, and then select “Eco” on the screen.
■Trip information
If the “Past Record” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.
Resetting the consumption
data
Average vehicle speed since
the engine was started
Elapsed time since the
engine was started
Fuel consumption in the past
15 minutes
Cruising range (P. 99)
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by
color into past averages and averages attained since the engine
switch was last turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart
key system). Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a ref-
erence.
These images are examples only.
: If equipped
The fuel consumption information can be displayed on Entune
Premium Audio and Entune Audio Plus screen.
Display the trip information or past record screen
Fuel consumption
1
2
3
4
5
6
99
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■Past record
If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.
Resetting the past record
data
Best recorded fuel consump-
tion
Average fuel consumption (if
equipped)
Previous fuel consumption
record
Current fuel economy
Update the average fuel consumption data
The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past
averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated.
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
These images are examples only.
■Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■Updating the past record data
Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the
current fuel consumption again.
■Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quan-
tity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a
result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
100 2. Instrument cluster
101
3
Operation of
each component
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................. 102
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Doors ................................ 109
Tailgate ............................. 116
Smart key system.............. 121
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats ........................ 129
Rear seats......................... 131
Head restraints.................. 134
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel .................. 138
Inside rear view mirror....... 140
Outside rear view
mirrors............................. 143
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows ................. 145
Back window (vehicles
with sliding type) ............. 148
Moon roof.......................... 149
102 3-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Type A
Keys
Key number plate
Type B
Keys
Key number plate
Type C
Keys
Operating the wireless remote con-
trol function
Key number plate
The keys
1
2
1
2
1
2
103
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
Type D
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key sys-
tem (P. 121)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
Mechanical keys
• Locks/unlocks only the
driver’s door
Key
• Locks/unlocks only the tailgate
Key number plate
Type C
Locks all the doors (P. 109)
Unlocks all the doors (P. 109)
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 3 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
Sounds the alarm (P. 104)
(press and hold)
Type D
Locks all the doors (P. 11 0)
Unlocks all the doors (P. 11 0)
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 3 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
Sounds the alarm (P. 104)
(press and hold)
1
2
3
4
Wireless remote control (type C or type D)
1
2
3
1
2
3
104 3-1. Key information
To take out the mechanical key,
push the release button and take
the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the
key only has grooves on one side.
If the key cannot be inserted in a
lock cylinder, turn it over and reat-
tempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the
mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key
battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you
will need the mechanical key. (P. 555)
■Panic mode (type C or type D)
Type C
Type D
Using the mechanical key (type D)
When is pressed for longer than
about 1 second, an alarm will sound inter-
mittently and the vehicle lights will flash to
deter any person from trying to break into
or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
wireless remote control.
When is pressed for longer than
about 1 second, an alarm will sound inter-
mittently and the vehicle lights will flash to
deter any person from trying to break into
or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.
105
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
■When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant (type
D)
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 389)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with
the electronic key only.
■If you lose your keys
New genuine key can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other key and
the key number stamped on your key number plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
■When riding in an aircraft (type C or type D)
When bringing an wireless remote control function onto an aircraft, make sure
you do not press any button on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you
are carrying the key in your bag, etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to
be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio
waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
■Conditions affecting operation (type C or type D)
Type C
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations:
●Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility
that generates strong radio waves
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communi-
cation devices
●When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
●When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
●When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
●When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a
personal computer
Type D
P. 124
106 3-1. Key information
■Key battery depletion (type C or type D)
Type C
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 481)
Type D
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine
stops. (P. 533)
●As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indi-
cate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary. (P. 481)
• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 1 m
(3 ft.) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers
■Replacing the battery (type C or type D)
P. 481
■Confirmation of the registered key number
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask
your Toyota dealer for details.
■Customization (type C or type D)
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 592)
107
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
■Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles without a smart key
system)
For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and New Caledonia
FCC ID: HYQ23AAH
FCC ID: HYQ23AAN
FCC ID: HYQ12BEL
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
<For 12BEL>
The FCC ID/IC Certification number is affixed inside the equipment. You can
find the ID/number when replacing the battery.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
<For 12BEL>
The FCC ID/IC Certification number is affixed inside the equipment. You can
find the ID/number when replacing the battery.
NOTE:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
(1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
(2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
<Pour 12BEL>
L’identification FCC/Ie numéro d’accréditation IC est apposé(e) à l’intérieur
de l’appareil. Cette identification/ce numéro est visible au remplacement de la
pile.
■Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem)
P. 127
108 3-1. Key information
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer, etc.
●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
●Do not disassemble the keys.
●Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
●Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as
TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equip-
ment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■Carrying the electronic key on your person (type D)
Carry the electronic key 10 cm (3.9 in.) or more away from electric appli-
ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances
within 10 cm (3.9 in.) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, caus-
ing the key to not function properly.
■In case of a smart entry & start system malfunction or other key-related
problems (type D)
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to
your Toyota dealer.
■When an electronic key is lost (type D)
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases signifi-
cantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic
keys that was provided with your vehicle.
109
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
Doors
◆Key
Vehicles without a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Turning the key unlocks the
driver’s door. Turning the key
again unlocks the other doors.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (P. 555)
◆Wireless remote control (if equipped)
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely locked.
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again
within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside
1
2
Vehicles without a smart key
system
Vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem
1
2
110 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
◆Smart key system (if equipped)
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
Grip the driver’s door handle
to unlock the door.
Make sure to touch the sensor
on the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked
for 3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part or lower
part of the driver’s door handle) to lock the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.
■Operation signals (vehicles with a wireless remote control or smart key
system)
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■Security feature (vehicles with a wireless remote control or smart key
system)
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of
the door handle (vehicles with a smart key system)
■Door lock buzzer (vehicles with a smart key system)
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the
buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
■Alarm (if equipped)
Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 78)
1
If the door will not lock even when the top-
side sensor area is touched, try touching
both the topside and underside sensor
areas at the same time.
2
111
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate
properly (if equipped)
Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (P. 555)
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. (P. 481)
◆Door lock switches
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
◆Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside
1
2
1
2
112 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
Vehicles without a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if either of the front doors is open and the
key is in the engine switch.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
The access door (rear door) can be opened using the inside handle.
Open the front door widely
Pull (from the outside) or
push (from the inside) the
inside handle of the access
door.
Open the access door
You can open and close the
access door only when the front
door is widely opened.
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
Access doors (Access Cab models only)
1
2
1
2
3
113
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear doors.
The following functions can be set or canceled:
Rear door child-protector lock (Double Cab models only)
1
2
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems (vehicles with an
automatic transmission)
Function Operation
Shift position linked door locking
function
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks
all the doors.
Shift position linked door unlocking
function
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks
all the doors.
Speed linked door locking function
All
the
doors are locked when the
vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.
Driver’s door linked door unlocking
function
Vehicles without a smart key system
All
the
doors are unlocked when the
driver’s door is opened within 10 sec-
onds after turning the engine switch to
the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
All the doors are unlocked when the
driver’s door is opened within
10 seconds after turning the engine
switch off.
114 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Setting and canceling the functions
The automatic door locking and unlocking functions can be set or
canceled on the Entune Audio system screen (P. 592) or by fol-
lowing the procedure below.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Close all the doors and turn
the engine switch to the “ON” position. (Perform step 2 within
10 seconds.)
Vehicles with a smart key system: Close all the doors and turn
the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform step 2 within
10 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N,
and press and hold the
driver's door lock switch
( or ) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch posi-
tions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel the function.
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are
locked and then unlocked.
1
2
Function Shift lever
position
Driver’s door lock
switch position
Shift position linked door lock-
ing function P
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Speed linked door locking func-
tion
N
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function
115
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 592)
WARNING
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out
of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
●Double Cab models only: Set the rear door child-protector locks when chil-
dren are seated in the rear seats.
NOTICE
■When opening or closing the front door and access door (Access Cab
models only)
The front door and access door could be damaged if they hit each other
when being opened or closed.
116 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Tailgate
Unlock the tailgate
Lock the tailgate
Pull the handle
Open the tailgate slowly
Tailgate will open slowly due to
damper.
The support cables will hold the
tailgate horizontal.
Lift and closing the tailgate
After closing the tailgate, try pulling
it toward you to make sure it is
securely locked.
The tailgate can be opened using the tailgate handle. The tail-
gate can be locked/unlocked using a key.
Locking/unlocking the tailgate
1
2
Opening/closing the tailgate
1
2
3
117
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■Before removing the tailgate
These connector covers are used when removing the tailgate, to
prevent the back-up camera wire harness connectors from being
contaminated.
Connector cover (Gray)
Connector cover (White)
Store the connector covers in the
glove box in a plastic bag when not
using.
To disconnect the wire harness
connectors ( and ),
depress small plastic tab on
connector and pull apart
from connector .
Tailgate wire harness con-
nector (White)
Frame wire harness connec-
tor (Gray)
Attach the connector cover
(White) to the frame wire har-
ness connector (Gray).
Connector cover (White)
Frame wire harness connec-
tor (Gray)
Removing the tailgate
1
1 2
1
2
1
2
2
2
118 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Pull out the plastic wire protec-
tor located in the vehicle bed by
pressing the tabs and pulling
the protector.
Be careful not to pull out all of the
tailgate wire harness. Doing so
may result in damage to vehicle
components.
Plastic wire protector
Open the tailgate.
Pull out the wire harness from
the vehicle bed.
Attach the connector cover
(Gray) to the tailgate wire har-
ness connector (White).
Tailgate wire harness con-
nector (White)
Connector cover (Gray)
3
4
5
6
1
119
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■Removing the tailgate
Open the tailgate to the angle
where you can release the
brackets on the support cables
from the lugs on both sides.
Lift the support cable bracket
up and slide it off.
To unhook the support cable
bracket, keep pulling up the clip on
the bracket and unhook the
bracket.
Support cable bracket
Tilt the tailgate to about 45°
from vertical and pull up the
right side of the tailgate to
unhook the right side.
Slide the tailgate a little to the
right to unhook the left side
being mindful of tailgate right-
hand side clearance to vehi-
cle’s rear bumper.
To attach the tailgate, follow the
removal procedure in reverse
order.
1
1
2
3
120 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
For rear end protection and easier
step-up loading.
To get on the rear step bumper,
use the shaded area in the illustra-
tion.
Rear step bumper
WARNING
■Before removing the tailgate
Disconnect the wire harness between the back-up camera and the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in serious personal injury or damage to the vehi-
cle components.
■Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious personal injury.
●Do not drive with the tailgate open.
●Do not allow others to get on the rear step bumper.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the tailgate wire harness
Do not pull out all of the tailgate wire harness before opening the tailgate.
■To prevent damage to the camera lens
Store the removed tailgate with the back-up camera lens facing upward.
■After closing the tailgate
Try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely locked.
■To prevent damage to the rear step bumper
Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time.
■To prevent damage to the tailgate and rear step bumper
Avoid possible contact between tailgate and rear bumper during tailgate
removal and reinstall.
121
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
Smart key system
●Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 110 )
●Starts the engine (P. 190)
■Antenna location
: If equipped
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying
the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
The driver should always carry the electronic key.
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
1
2
122 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages
shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle
and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate mea-
sures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display.
(P. 519)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when
only alarms are sounded.
When locking or unlocking the
doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is within
about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the driver’s
door handle. (Only the door
detecting the key can be oper-
ated.)
When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the
vehicle.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm sounds
once for 5 seconds
An attempt was made
to lock the vehicle while
a door was open.
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Exterior alarm sounds
once for 5 seconds
An attempt was made
to lock the doors using
the smart key system
while the electronic key
was still inside the vehi-
cle.
Retrieve the electronic
key from the vehicle
and lock the doors
again.
An attempt was made
to lock either front door
by opening a door and
putting the inside lock
button into the lock
position, then closing
the door by pulling on
the outside door handle
with the electronic key
still inside the vehicle.
123
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic
key battery and the battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in
operation for a long time.
●In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to
unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of
the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
●If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors
cannot be unlocked at any door except the driver’s door. In this case, take
hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the
mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
The system will resume operation when
●The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch when carrying the
electronic key on your person.
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control. (P. 109)
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 555)
■Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping
the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Interior alarm sounds
continuously
An attempt was made
to open the door and
exit the vehicle when
the shift lever was not
in P.
Shift the shift lever to P.
The engine switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s
door was open (or the
driver’s door was
opened while the
engine switch was in
ACCESSORY mode).
Turn the engine switch
off and close the
driver’s door.
Press twice while pressing and
holding . Confirm that the electronic
key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart key system cannot be used. To
cancel the function, press any of the elec-
tronic key buttons.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
124 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the
communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected,
preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobi-
lizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 555)
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication device
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
●When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
●When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the
back window
●When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic
devices
125
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■Note for the entry function
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas),
the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near
the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to
the rear bumper center when the trunk is opened.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel or floor, or in the console
box or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch modes are
changed.
●Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave recep-
tion conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the
door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic
key inside the vehicle.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the elec-
tronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start
the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
●The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the
door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is
within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic
key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be
unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock
the doors.)
●Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent
lock or unlock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor
again.
●When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition sig-
nals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition
signals will be given.
●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effec-
tive range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the
following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key
system. (P. 123)
●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information dis-
play and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock
all the doors.
126 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,
snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or
use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.
●If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
●A sudden handle operation or a handle operation immediately after entering
the effective range may prevent the doors from being unlocked. Touch the
door unlock sensor and check that the doors are unlocked before pulling the
door handle again.
●Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door han-
dle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.
■Note for the unlocking function
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the origi-
nal position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle
again.
●If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft.
(2 m) of the vehicle.
●The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (P. 592)
■To operate the system properly
●Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
●Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may
not operate.)
■If the smart key system does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 555)
●Starting the engine: P. 555
■Customization
Settings (e. g. smart key system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 592)
■If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
●Locking and unlocking the doors:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 109, 555)
●Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: P. 555
●Stopping the engine: P. 190
127
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■Certification for the smart key system
For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and New Caledonia
FCC ID: HYQ23AAP
FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
(1) I’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
(2) l’utilisateur de I’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
128 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
WARNING
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (P. 121)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
●User of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
129
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
Front seats
When the occupant’s back
presses against the seatback dur-
ing a rear-end collision, the head
restraint moves slightly forward to
help reduce the risk of whiplash
on the seat occupant.
Adjustment procedure
Seat position adjustment lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Seat lumbar support adjust-
ment knob
Active head restraints
1
2
3
130 3-3. Adjusting the seats
■Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to
move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may show the head
restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.
WARNING
■When adjusting the seat position
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
■Seat adjustment
●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.
■When adjusting the seat positions
Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.
Inner
structure
During
rear-end
collision
131
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
Rear seats
Stow the seat belt buckles.
This prevents the seat belt buckles
from interfering with raising the
bottom cushion.
Raise the bottom cushion up
while pulling the lever until it
locks.
When returning the bottom cushion
to its original position, push the
bottom cushion down while pulling
the lever until the bottom cushion
locks into the seat position.
■Before folding down the rear seats
Pass the seat belts through the
seat belt hangers.
This prevents the shoulder belt
from being damaged.
Make sure that the seat belts are
removed from the hangers before
using them.
: If equipped
Raising the bottom cushion (Access Cab models)
1
2
Folding down the rear seats (Double Cab models)
132 3-3. Adjusting the seats
■Folding down the rear seats
Make sure to slide the front seat forward as much as possible.
Remove the head restraints
and swing the bottom cush-
ion up by pulling the lock
release strap.
Attach the head restraints to
the holders located on the
back sides of the bottom
cushions.
Installing the head restrains in
the following manner:
Outer head restraints: The front
of the head restraint facing rear-
ward.
Center head restraint: The front of the head restraint facing forward.
Fold down the seatback by
pulling the lock release strap.
■Returning the rear seats
Reverse the steps for folding down the rear seats.
1
2
3
4
133
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
WARNING
■When raising the bottom cushion or fold the seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).
Access Cab models
●Do not allow anyone to raise the bottom cushion while driving.
●Do not allow anyone to sit on the auxiliary box
Double Cab models
●Do not allow anyone to fold the seatbacks down while driving.
●Do not allow anyone to sit on the folded seatbacks while driving.
■When returning the seats to their original position
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
Access Cab models
●Make sure the bottom cushions are securely locked.
Double Cab models
●Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing it forward and rear-
ward on the top.
●Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seat.
●Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.
NOTICE
■Stowing the seat belts
The seat belts and the buckles must be stowed before you raise the bottom
cushion or fold down the rear seatbacks.
134 3-3. Adjusting the seats
Head restraints
Vertical adjustment
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Access Cab models
Folding the head restraints
To use
Lift up the head restraint until it
locks.
To fold
Pull the head restraint lock release
lever to fold the head restraint.
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
1
2
Rear seats
1
2
135
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
Double Cab models
Folding the head restrains (outer head restraints)
To use
Lift up and push down the head
restraint to the lowest lock position.
To fold
Pull the head restraint up while
pressing the lock release buttons.
Vertical adjustment (center head restraint)
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
1
2
1
2
136 3-3. Adjusting the seats
■Removing the head restraints
Front seats
Rear seats (Double Cab models only)
■Installing the head restraints
Front seats
Rear seats (Double Cab models only)
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Outer head restraints: Pull the head
restraint up while pressing the both lock
release buttons.
Center head restraints: Pull the head
restraint up while pressing the lock
release button.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Rear center head restraint: Press and
hold the lock release button when low-
ering the head restraint.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Rear center head restraint: Press and
hold the lock release button when low-
ering the head restraint.
Lock release button
Lock release button
Lock release button
Lock release button
137
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint (Double Cab models only)
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
WARNING
■Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
138 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel
Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel hori-
zontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up
to secure the steering wheel.
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
■After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
Adjustment procedure
1
2
Horn
139
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
WARNING
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not
sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
140 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Inside rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving
posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced
by operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable suffi-
cient confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Anti-glare function
1
2
141
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles
behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare function mode
On/off
When the automatic anti-glare function is in on mode, the indicator illumi-
nates.
Vehicles without a smart key system:
The function will set to on mode each time the engine switch is turned to
the “ON” position.
Pressing the button turns the function to off mode. (The indicator also turns
off.)
Vehicles with a smart key system:
The function will set to on mode each time the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to off mode. (The indicator also turns
off.)
Type A Type B
142 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
■To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
To ensure that the sensors operate prop-
erly, do not touch or cover them.
WARNING
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
143
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
Outside rear view mirrors
To select a mirror to adjust, turn
the switch.
Left
Right
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle’s rear.
Adjustment procedure
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
Folding the mirrors
144 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
■Mirror angle can be adjusted when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 372, 379)
WARNING
■Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot
and burn you.
145
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Type A
Closing
Opening
One-touch opening* (driver’s
window only)
*: To stop the window partway, oper-
ate the switch in the opposite direc-
tion.
Type B
Closing
One-touch closing* (front seat
windows)
Opening
One-touch opening* (front seat
windows)
*: To stop the window partway, oper-
ate the switch in the opposite direc-
tion.
Press the switch down to lock the
passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or clos-
ing a passenger window.
Opening and closing procedures
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
Window lock switch
146 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They can-
not, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They
cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function (type B only)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, win-
dow travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■When the power window does not close normally (type B only)
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on
the relevant door.
●After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power
window switch in the one-touch closing position while the engine switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode.
●If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation as
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following proce-
dure.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue
holding the switch for a further 4 seconds after the window has closed.
If jam detection occurs during step , repeat step within 4 seconds of
jam occurrence.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for more than 1 second after the window has
opened completely.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once
again. Continue holding the switch for more than 1 second after the win-
dow has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the
beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after perform-
ing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
1
1 1
2
3
147
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■Closing the windows
●The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the
operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is
possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in
the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use
the window lock switch. (P. 145)
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■Jam protection function (type B only)
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
148 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Back window (vehicles with sliding type)
Open/close
Push the lock release lever and
slide the back window.
■Closing the back window
Make sure that the back window is securely closed after closing it.
Opening and closing
WARNING
■Caution while driving
Keep the back window closed.
This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also
prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
149
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
Moon roof
Opens the moon roof*
Closes the moon roof*
*: Lightly press either way of the
moon roof switch to stop the moon
roof partway.
Tilts the moon roof up*
Tilts the moon roof down*
*: Lightly press either way of the
moon roof switch to stop the moon
roof partway.
: If equipped
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and
tilt it up and down.
Opening and closing
1
2
Tilting up and down
1
2
150 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■The moon roof can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. It cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot,
however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon
roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens
slightly.
■To reduce moon roof wind noise
When the moon roof is opened automatically, it will stop slightly before the
fully open position. Driving with the moon roof in this position can help reduce
wind noise.
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
151
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
■When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
●If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” (sliding close) switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 sec-
onds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 sec-
ond. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
●If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “UP” (tilt up) switch*1 until the moon roof moves into
the tilt up position and stops.
Release the “UP” (tilt up) switch once and then press and hold the “UP”
(tilt up) switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up posi-
tion.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to
be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 seconds pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
“CLOSE” (sliding close) or “UP” (tilt up) switch, and the moon roof will tilt
up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and
close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-
dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■Moon roof open reminder function
Vehicles without a multi-information display
An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not
fully closed and the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a multi-information display
An alarm will sound and message will be shown on the multi-information dis-
play when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not fully closed and
the engine switch off.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
152 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■When the battery is disconnected
The moon roof must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.
Push and hold the switch toward the “UP” (tilt up) side or “CLOSE” (slid-
ing close) side.
After the moon roof will tilt up and down, release the switch.
To ensure the initialization is complete, make sure automatic opening and
closing functions work properly.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 592)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■Opening the moon roof
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■Closing the moon roof
●The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations. In
order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a
child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passen-
gers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being oper-
ated.
●When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■Jam protection function
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
1
2
3
153
4
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle............. 154
Cargo and luggage ........... 163
Vehicle load limits ............. 167
Trailer towing..................... 168
Dinghy towing ................... 186
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without
a smart key system)........ 187
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a smart
key system)..................... 190
Automatic transmission..... 195
Manual transmission ......... 199
Turn signal lever................ 201
Parking brake.................... 202
4-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch................ 203
Fog light switch ................. 207
Windshield wipers and
washer ............................ 208
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap .................................. 211
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Cruise control.................... 215
Intuitive parking assist....... 220
Rear view monitor
system ............................ 226
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor) ........ 236
• The Blind Spot Monitor
function ......................... 238
• The Rear Cross Traffic
Alert function................. 241
Four-wheel drive system... 244
AUTO LSD system............ 248
Rear differential lock
system ............................ 250
Active traction control
system ............................ 253
Multi-terrain Select ............ 255
Crawl Control .................... 259
Clutch start cancel
switch.............................. 263
Driving assist systems ...... 264
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips ............. 270
Off-road precautions ......... 273
154 4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle
P. 187, 190
Automatic transmission
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 195)
Release the parking brake. (P. 202)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelera-
tor pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Manual transmission
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
(P. 199)
Release the parking brake. (P. 202)
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift
lever to P or N. (P. 195)
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift
lever to N. (P. 199)
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe
driving:
Starting the engine
Driving
Stopping
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
155
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 202)
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 195)
Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the
“LOCK” position to stop the engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Press the engine switch to stop
the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 202)
Shift the shift lever to N. (P. 199)
If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R needed.
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Automatic transmission
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Manual transmission
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as gradually
releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Parking the vehicle
Starting off on a steep uphill
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
1
2
3
156 4-1. Before driving
■When starting off on an uphill (vehicles with the hill-start assist control
system)
The hill-start assist control will activate. (P. 265)
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the win-
dows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be espe-
cially slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road sur-
face, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Engine speed while driving (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to
meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
●The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
●When the accelerator pedal is released
●When the brake pedal is depressed while power mode is selected
■Restraining the engine output (Brake Override System)
●When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the
engine output may be restrained.
●Vehicles without a multi-information display: A warning light comes on while
the system is operating. (P. 513)
●Vehicles with a multi-information display: A warning message is displayed
on the multi-information display while the system is operating. If a warning
message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and
follow the instructions. (P. 522)
■Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recom-
mended:
●For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
●For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (P. 579)
157
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
■When turning off the engine
The emission system operating sounds may continue for a short time after
the engine is turned off. This is not a malfunction, and helps to ensure optimal
performance of the emission system.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to difficulty
in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelera-
tor pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
●During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 501
●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P. 195, 199)
●Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle.
158 4-1. Before driving
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
●Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.
■When shifting the shift lever
●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll
backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while
the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not shift the shift lever to P
while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving
backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
●Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a
gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the
vehicle that may cause an accident.
159
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
WARNING
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (automatic transmission only) or
N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an
accident.
●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents
due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal
while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may rupture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s
electrical components.
●Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
●Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi-
cle.
160 4-1. Before driving
WARNING
●Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (automatic trans-
mission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
●Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■When braking
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
■If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or
the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline com-
ponents or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.
161
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain the engine output.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
●Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,
do not release the clutch abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, trans-
mission and gears.
●Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
●Do not use any gear other than the first gear when starting off and moving
forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
●Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
●Do not shift the shift lever to R when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so
may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.
■When parking the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is
accidentally depressed.
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
162 4-1. Before driving
NOTICE
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehi-
cle.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
●The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 536)
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain, etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-
mission, transfer (4WD models) differentials, etc.
●Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
163
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Cargo and luggage
Side rails
To use the deck rails, you must
install genuine Toyota accessories
or their equivalent for the deck
rails.
Follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions and precautions when install-
ing a genuine Toyota accessory or
equivalent.
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load:
●Stow cargo and luggage in the rear deck whenever possible.
●Be sure all items are secured in place.
●Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-
ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
Deck rails
1
WARNING
■When you secure cargo with the deck rails
Be sure to follow the instructions below in order to avoid the cargo coming
loose.
●Do not install accessories (tie-down cleats, storage boxes, etc.) at more
than the following number of locations per deck rail.
• Side rail:
Short deck—Max. 3 locations
Long deck—Max. 4 locations
●Spread out tie-down/support locations evenly along the length of the rails.
●Do not exceed a total tensile load of 440 lb. (200 kg) per deck rail.
●To prevent luggage or cargo from sliding forward during braking, make
sure the deck rail accessories such as storage box are securely attached
on the deck rails.
164 4-1. Before driving
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5150) =
650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle. (P. 167)
Capacity and distribution
165
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (P. 567)
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in
your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight)
of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity
will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)
*1: A = Weight of people
*2: B = Total load capacity
*3: C = Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of
D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced
E lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)
*4: D = Additional weight of people
*5: E = Available cargo and luggage load
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
Calculation formula for your vehicle
1
2
166 4-1. Before driving
WARNING
■Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compart-
ment:
●Receptacles containing gasoline
●Aerosol cans
■Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly,
may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or
passengers, possibly causing an accident.
●Do not stack anything behind the front seats higher than the seat-
backs.
●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• On the auxiliary box or tray that has no lid
●Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
●Never allow anyone to ride in the rear deck. It is not designed for pas-
sengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly
fastened.
■Capacity and distribution
●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper
loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.
167
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Vehicle load limits
◆Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): P. 5 6 7
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
◆Seating capacity
Access Cab models
Vehicles without rear seats: 2 occupants
Vehicles with rear seats: 4 occupants (Front 2, Rear 2)
Double Cab models
5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do
not exceed the total load capacity.
◆TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): P. 172
TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.
◆Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
■Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 472)
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.
WARNING
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering
and braking ability, resulting in an accident.
168 4-1. Before driving
Trailer towing
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-car-
rying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on
handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consump-
tion. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you are
using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment
has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you
employ the requisite driving habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by
trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes,
the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in
accordance with your trailer’s characteristics and operating
conditions.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction
caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
169
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
■GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
combination weight. The gross
combination weight is the sum
of the total vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment
installed on the vehicle) and the
weight of the trailer being towed
(including the cargo in the
trailer).
■GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
vehicle weight. The gross vehi-
cle weight is the total weight of
the vehicle. When towing a
trailer, it is the sum of the vehi-
cle weight (including the occu-
pants, cargo and any optional
equipment installed on the vehi-
cle) and the tongue weight.
■GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
axle weight. The gross axle
weight is the load placed on
each axle (front and rear).
Towing related terms
170 4-1. Before driving
■TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
trailer weight. The gross trailer
weight is the sum of the trailer
weight and the weight of the
cargo in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming
base vehicle with one driver,
one front passenger, towing
package (if available), hitch and
hitch systems (if required).
Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will
reduce the trailer weight rating so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR and
GAWR.
If the gross trailer weight exceeds 3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recommended
to use a trailer with 2 or more axles.
■Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)
The trailer weight rating for tow-
ing a trailer without a trailer ser-
vice brake system.
■Tongue Weight
The load placed on the trailer
hitch ball. (P. 175)
171
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
●The gross trailer weight must never exceed the TWR described in
the table. (P. 172)
●The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR
described in the table. (P. 172)
●The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated
on the Certification Label.
●The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR
indicated on the Certification Label.
●If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service
brakes are required.
●If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control
device with sufficient capacity is required.
●If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distrib-
uting hitch with sufficient capacity is required.
Weight limits
Access Cab models Double Cab models
172 4-1. Before driving
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the
limits.
■GCWR* and TWR*
Access Cab models
*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P. 569)
*2: Vehicles without a towing package
*3: Vehicles with a towing package
GCWR, TWR, Unbraked TWR, Fifth wheel and Gooseneck towing
TWR
*: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE
International per SAE J2807.
Model code*1Engine Driving
system GCWR TWR
TRN265L-CRTSKA
2TR-FE
engine
2WD 7810 lb.
(3540 kg)
3500 lb.
(1590 kg)
TRN245L-CRMSKA
4WD
8020 lb.
(3635 kg)
3500 lb.
(1590 kg)
TRN245L-CRTSKA 8050 lb.
(3650 kg)
3500 lb.
(1590 kg)
GRN325L-CRTSHA
2GR-FKS
engine
2WD
7890 lb.*2
(3590 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11310 lb.*3
(5130 kg)
6800 lb.*3
(3085 kg)
GRN305L-CRFSHA
4WD
8150 lb.*2
(3695 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11280 lb.*3
(5115 kg)
6500 lb.*3
(2950 kg)
GRN305L-CRTSHA
8130 lb.*2
(3685 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11360 lb.*2
(5150 kg)
6500 lb.*3
(2950 kg)
173
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Double Cab models
Model code*1Engine Driving
system GCWR TWR
TRN265L-PRTSKA 2TR-FE
engine
2WD
7920 lb.
(3590 kg)
3500 lb.
(1590 kg)
GRN325L-PRTSHA
2GR-FKS
engine
8010 lb.*2
(3630 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11330 lb.*3
(5135 kg)
6700 lb.*3
(3040 kg)
GRN325L-PRTLHA
8060 lb.*2
(3655 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11280 lb.*3
(5115 kg)
6600 lb.*3
(2995 kg)
GRN330L-PRTSHA
8060 lb.*2
(3655 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11280 lb.*3
(5115 kg)
6600 lb.*3
(2995 kg)
GRN330L-PRTLHA
8110 lb.*2
(3670 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11330 lb.*3
(5135 kg)
6600 lb.*3
(2995 kg)
174 4-1. Before driving
*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P. 569)
*2: Vehicles without a towing package
*3: Vehicles with a towing package
■Unbraked TWR*
1000 lb. (450 kg)
■Fifth wheel and gooseneck towing TWR*
Toyota does not recommend fifth wheel and gooseneck towing.
Model code*1Engine Driving
system GCWR TWR
GRN305L-PRFSHA
2GR-FKS
engine 4WD
8270 lb.*2
(3750 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11300 lb.*3
(5125 kg)
6400 lb.*3
(2900 kg)
GRN305L-PRTSHA
8250 lb.*2
(3740 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11280 lb.*3
(5115 kg)
6400 lb.*3
(2900 kg)
GRN305L-PRTLHA
8310 lb.*2
(3765 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11330 lb.*3
(5135 kg)
6400 lb.*3
(2900 kg)
GRN310L-PRTSHA
8310 lb.*2
(3765 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11330 lb.*3
(5135 kg)
6400 lb.*3
(2900 kg)
GRN310L-PRTLHA
8360 lb.*2
(3790 kg)
3500 lb.*2
(1590 kg)
11090 lb.*3
(5030 kg)
6000 lb.*3
(2720 kg)
*: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE
International per SAE J2807.
175
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
●A recommended tongue weight or kingpin weight varies in accor-
dance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.
●To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must
be loaded by referring to the following instructions.
• Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue
weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue Weight/Gross trailer weight x 100
= 9% to 11%)
Gross trailer weight
Tongue Weight
If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front
axle to the same weight as before the trailer connection.
If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the
front fender height above the front axle before connection. Adjust
weight distributing hitch torque until front fender is returned to the
same height as before connection.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight
can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weigh-
ing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk
yard, etc.
Trailer Tongue Weight
1
2
176 4-1. Before driving
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Toyota rec-
ommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.
●If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
●Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight require-
ment of your vehicle.
●Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
●Lubricate the hitch ball and kingpin with a light coating of grease.
●Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After
removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to
prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.
The rear bumper of your vehicle is
equipped with a hole to install a
trailer ball. If you have any ques-
tions, contact your Toyota dealer.
The gross trailer weight (trailer
weight plus cargo weight) when
towing with the bumper must never
exceed the TWR (P. 172) or
3500 lb. (1590 kg) whichever is
lower.
Hitch
Bumper towing (vehicles with steel bumper only)
177
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.
Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer cou-
pler. Most couplers are stamped
with the required trailer ball size.
Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut by at least 2
threads.
Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.
Weight carrying ball position:
52.0 in. (1320.8 mm)
Hitch receiver pin hole position:
45.2 in. (1148.8 mm)
Selecting trailer ball
1
2
Trailer class
IV II and III I
Typical trailer ball size 2 5/16 in. 2 in. 1 7/8 in.
Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball
3
4
1
2
178 4-1. Before driving
Use the wire harness stored in the
rear end of the vehicle.
■Service connector for towing brake controller (vehicles with a towing
package)
Connecting trailer lights
Your vehicle is equipped with a service
connector for the trailer brake controller
as shown.
179
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. To help avoid
an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when
towing:
●Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not
exceed the posted towing speed limit.
●Toyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph
(104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the
posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set
forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability
of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as
speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.
●Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-
trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
●Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in
an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel
of the vehicle-trailer combination.
●Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing
without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an acci-
dent.
●As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-
vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h)
of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
●Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jack-
knifing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or
slippery surfaces.
●Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
●Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making
a turn.
●Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making
a wider than normal turning radius.
Trailer towing tips
180 4-1. Before driving
●Slow down before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery
surfaces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.
●Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires consider-
able distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of
your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing
lanes.
●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: To maintain engine brak-
ing efficiency and charging system performance when using engine
braking, do not use the transmission in D. If in the S mode, the
transmission shift range position must be in 5 or lower.
●Vehicles with a manual transmission: To maintain engine braking
efficiency and charging system performance when using engine
braking, do not use the fifth gear (5-speed manual transmission) or
the sixth gear (6-speed manual transmission).
●Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long
downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do
not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long down-
hill grades.
●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes
too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
●Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may over-
heat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving
up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge
indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in
use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
(P. 561)
181
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
●Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P (automatic transmission) or in 1 or R (manual
transmission). Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so
only after performing the following:
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and
trailer’s wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Shift into P (automatic transmission) or 1 or R (manual transmis-
sion) and turn off the engine.
●When restarting after parking on a slope:
With the transmission in P (automatic transmission) or the clutch
pedal (manual transmission) depressed, start the engine. On
vehicles with an automatic transmission, be sure to keep the
brake pedal pressed.
Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.
Release the parking brake (and also the brake pedal on vehicles
with an automatic transmission), and slowly pull or back away
from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
182 4-1. Before driving
■Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height
■Before towing
Check that the following conditions are met:
●Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (P. 577)
●Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommen-
dation.
●All trailer lights work as required by law.
●All lights work each time you connect them.
●The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
●The trailer is level when it is hitched.
Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight,
overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
●The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
●The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or
local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for tow-
ing purposes.
●Depress power mode button (vehicles with an automatic transmission).
(P. 196)
No matter which class of tow hitch
applies, for a more safe trailer hookup,
the trailer ball setup must be the proper
height for the coupler on the trailer.
Coupler
Trailer ball
1
2
183
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
■Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components
(such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota rec-
ommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for
over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start
towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed
of less than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle
acceleration.
■Maintenance
●If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. (See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide”/“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
●Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately
600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
■If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can
adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
●If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle
and trailer should stabilize. (if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can also help to
stabilize the vehicle and trailer.)
●After the trailer swaying has stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred
is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the
towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.
184 4-1. Before driving
WARNING
■Trailer towing precautions
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance
with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so
could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability
and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and
performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing
a trailer.
■To avoid accident or injury
●Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
●If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device
with sufficient capacity is required.
●If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing
hitch with sufficient capacity is required.
●Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads
as close to the trailer axle as possible.
●Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the
speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual,
whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross-
winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc., to help avoid an accident. If you
experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow
down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of
which you experience the instability.
●Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
●Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery sur-
faces.
●Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight,
gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.
●Do not use cruise control when towing. (if equipped)
●Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long
downhill grades.
●Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before
descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do
not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill
grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the
brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result
in reduced braking efficiency.
●Do not tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is installed on your vehi-
cle.
185
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
WARNING
■Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the
hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of
towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight
rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum
weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight
rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting
in death or serious personal injuries.
■When towing a trailer
Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable fed-
eral and state/provincial regulations.
●If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are
required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all appli-
cable federal and state/provincial regulations.
●Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehi-
cle’s braking effectiveness.
●Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both
the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch
ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
NOTICE
■When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install
the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
■Do not directly splice trailer lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage
your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.
186 4-1. Before driving
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels
on the ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.
187
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a
smart key system)
Automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the engine.
Manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the engine.
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked and
the key can be removed. (Vehicles
with an automatic transmission:
The key can be removed only
when the shift lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
Starting the engine
Changing the engine switch positions
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
188 4-2. Driving procedures
■Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmis-
sion).
■If the engine does not start (vehicles with engine immobilizer system)
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 69)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
■When the steering lock cannot be released
■Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position to remind you to remove the key.
Push in the key and turn it to the
“LOCK” position.
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly left and
right.
1
2
189
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
WARNING
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Caution while driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn
the engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An accident
may result if the engine is stopped while driving. (P. 501)
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long peri-
ods of time without the engine running.
■When starting the engine
●Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.
190 4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a
smart key system)
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
and a message will be dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play.
If it is not displayed, the engine
cannot be started.
Press the engine switch.
The engine will crank until it starts
or for up to 30 seconds, whichever
is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is completely
started.
The engine can be started from
any engine switch mode.
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the parking brake. (P. 202)
Press the engine switch.
Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the instru-
ment cluster is off.
Performing the following operations when carrying the elec-
tronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine
switch modes.
Starting the engine
1
2
3
4
Stopping the engine
1
2
3
4
5
191
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with brake
pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can be
used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be
used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off the
engine, the engine switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode, not
to off.
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to
ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the
switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that “Turn Power OFF” is displayed on the multi-information
display and then press the engine switch once.
Check that “Turn Power OFF” on the multi-information display is off.
Changing engine switch modes
1
2
3
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other
than P
1
2
3
4
192 4-2. Driving procedures
■Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-
TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this
function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long peri-
ods of time when the engine is not running.
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 106
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 124
■Note for the entry function
P. 125
■If the engine does not start
●The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 69)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
●Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the
shift lever is displaced out of P. “Shift to P Position” will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
■Steering lock
After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the
steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the
engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
■When the steering lock cannot be released
■Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, operation of the motor
may be suspended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short
period of time. In this case, refrain from running the engine. After about
10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.
A message will be displayed on the multi-
information display.
Check that the shift lever is in P. Press the
engine switch while turning the steering
wheel left and right.
193
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
■When “Smart Entry & Start System Check” is displayed on the multi-
information display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toy-
ota dealer immediately.
■If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 481
■Operation of the engine switch
●When operating the engine switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the
switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the engine switch
mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.
●If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine
switch off, the engine may not start in some cases. After turning the engine
switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the engine.
■If the smart key system has been deactivated by a customized setting
P. 555
WARNING
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Otherwise, the
steering lock function will activate and this may lead to an accident, result-
ing in death or serious injury.
■Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly
3 times or more in succession. (P. 501)
However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emer-
gency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will
make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
194 4-2. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
●Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode
for long periods of time without the engine running.
●If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is displayed on the multi-information
display while the engine is not running, the engine switch is not off. Exit the
vehicle after turning the engine switch off.
●Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If
the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will
not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehi-
cle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.
■When starting the engine
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch
If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual,
such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact
your Toyota dealer immediately.
195
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Automatic transmission
Vehicles without a smart key system:
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the shift
lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehi-
cle is completely stopped.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the shift
lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehi-
cle is completely stopped.
: If equipped
Shifting the shift lever
196 4-2. Driving procedures
*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible
gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary
upshifting.
Use when high levels of response and feeling are desirable, such as
when driving in mountainous regions or when pulling a trailer.
Press the “ECT PWR” button to select power mode.
The “ECT PWR” indicator comes on.
Press the button again to cancel power mode.
Shift position purpose
Shift position Function
PParking the vehicle/starting the engine
RReversing
NNeutral
(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)
DNormal driving*1
SS mode driving*2 (P. 197)
Selecting power mode
Type A Type B
197
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever can be oper-
ated as follows:
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to 5 or 4 accord-
ing to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 if
the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position.
(P. 198)
■Shift ranges and their functions
●You can choose from 6 levels engine braking force.
●A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than
a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.
Selecting shift ranges in the S position
1
2
198 4-2. Driving procedures
■AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to the driver per-
formance and driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
(Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
■When driving with cruise control activated (if equipped)
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in S mode and down-
shifting to 5 or 4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (P. 215)
■If the shift lever cannot be shift from P
P. 553
■If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer, immediately.
■Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■Transmission protection function
If the tires spin continually when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or
snow, or if the accelerator pedal is depressed and released repeatedly while
driving, the automatic transmission temperature may become too high and
the automatic transmission may be damaged.
To avoid damaging the automatic transmission, the system may temporarily
lock the gear.
If the automatic transmission temperature falls, the gear locking is canceled
and the automatic transmission is returned to the normal operation.
WARNING
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.
199
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Manual transmission
5-speed models
Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and
then release it slowly.
6-speed models
Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and
then release it slowly.
: If equipped
Shifting the shift lever
200 4-2. Driving procedures
■Maximum allowable speed
Observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each gear when maxi-
mum acceleration is necessary.
mph (km/h)
■Reverse warning buzzer (6-speed models only)
A buzzer will sound to inform the driver if the shift lever is shifted to the R
position.
Shift position Transfer position Maximum speed
5-speed models 6-speed models
1“2WD” and “4H” 29 (48) 32 (52)
“4L” 12 (20) 12 (20)
2“2WD” and “4H” 54 (87) 64 (103)
“4L” 22 (34) 25 (39)
3“2WD” and “4H” 88 (138) 97 (157)
“4L” 34 (55) 37 (60)
4“2WD” and “4H” 110 (176) 107 (173)
“4L” 49 (79) 49 (80)
5“2WD” and “4H” —107 (173)
“4L” —58 (94)
201
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Lane change to the right (move
the lever partway and release
it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.
Lane change to the left (move
the lever partway and release
it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
Left turn
■Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
202 4-2. Driving procedures
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, fully
pull the parking brake lever
while depressing the brake
pedal.
To release the parking brake,
slightly raise the lever and
lower it completely while press-
ing the button.
■Usage in winter time
P. 271
1
2
NOTICE
■Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
203
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
Headlight switch
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
Type A
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, daytime
running lights and instru-
ment panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above (except
daytime running lights)
turn on.
The headlights, daytime
running lights (P. 205)
and all the lights listed
above turn on and off auto-
matically.
(When the engine switch is
in the “ON” position [vehi-
cles without a smart key
system] or IGNITION ON
mode [vehicles with a
smart key system])
Off
The daytime running lights turn on. (P. 205)
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
204 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Type B
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, daytime
running lights and instru-
ment panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above (except
daytime running lights)
turn on.
The daytime running lights
turn on. (P. 205)
Off
Type C
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, daytime
running lights and instru-
ment panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above (except
daytime running lights)
turn on.
The daytime running lights
turn on. (P. 205)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
205
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to turn
on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
■Daytime running light system
●To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving,
the front turn signal/parking lights (bulb type) or the parking lights (LED type)
turn on automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake
is released with the headlight switch in the “AUTO” (type A), “DRL” (type B)
or (type C) position. (Illuminate brighter than the front turn signal/
parking lights [bulb type] or the parking lights [LED type]). Daytime running
lights are not designed for use at night.
●Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve
fuel economy.
■Headlight control sensor (vehicles with an automatic light control sys-
tem)
Turning on the high beam headlights
1
2
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the
windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
206 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■Automatic light off system
When the light switch is in or : The lights turn off 30 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a smart key
system) or off (vehicles with a smart key system) and a door is opened and all
of the doors are closed. (Vehicles with a wireless remote control function: The
lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed while all the doors are
locked.)
When the light switch is in : The lights turn off after the engine switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or off
(vehicles with a smart key system) and the driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehi-
cles without a smart key system) or to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a
smart key system), or turn the light switch off, then turn it to or to .
If any of the doors is kept open and the engine switch is in the “LOCK” posi-
tion (vehicles without a smart key system) or off (vehicles with a smart key
system), the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.
■Light reminder function (vehicles with a multi-information display)
An alarm will sound and message will be shown on the multi-information dis-
play when the driver's door is opened with the lights are turned on and the
engine switch off.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 592)
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
207
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
Fog light switch
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Turns the front fog lights
off
Turns the front fog lights
on
■Fog lights can be used when
The parking lights are on or the headlights are on in low beam.
: If equipped
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving con-
ditions, such as in rain and fog.
1
2
208 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
Operate the lever as follows to operate the wipers.
Vehicles without intermittent type
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Off
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
High speed windshield
wiper operation
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Temporary operation
Washer operation
Operating the wiper lever
1
2
3
4
5
209
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
Vehicles with intermittent type
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Off
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
High speed windshield
wiper operation
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Temporary operation
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is
selected.
Increases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer
squirts.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
210 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
WARNING
■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes
warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
211
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
Opening the fuel tank cap
●Vehicles without a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.
●Vehicles with a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and win-
dows are closed.
●Confirm the type of fuel.
■Fuel types
P. 579
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
212 4-4. Refueling
WARNING
■When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling, because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
●Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
●Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
●Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally, or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle’s painted surface.
213
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
Open the fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
open.
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
Opening the fuel tank cap
1
2
Closing the fuel tank cap
214 4-4. Refueling
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
WARNING
■When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Otherwise, doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may
result in death or serious injury.
215
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
216 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come
on*.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on*.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the lever is released becomes the
set speed.
*: For vehicles with a multi-information display, this light illuminates on the
multi-information display.
Setting the vehicle speed
1
2
217
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed
is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired direc-
tion.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continu-
ally until the lever is released.
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied or the
clutch pedal (manual transmission
only) is depressed.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than approx-
imately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Adjusting the set speed
1
2
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
1
2
218 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Cruise control can be set when
●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The shift lever is in D or range 4 or
higher of S has been selected.
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
●The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
●Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased
by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the
lever down to set the new speed.
■Automatic cruise control cancellation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below
the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●VSC is activated.
●TRAC is activated for a period a time.
●When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC off switch.
●4WD models: The operation cannot be switched for 5 seconds or more after
operating the front-wheel drive control switch.
■If the cruise control indicator light comes on in yellow (vehicles without
a multi-information display)
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels imme-
diately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control
system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-
information display (vehicles with a multi-information display)
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels imme-
diately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control
system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
219
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
WARNING
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
220 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Intuitive parking assist
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
Turns the intuitive parking assist
on/off
When on, the indicator light comes
on to inform the driver that the sys-
tem is operational.
: If equipped
The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when paral-
lel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the
sensors and communicated via the multi-information display
and buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this
system.
Types of sensors
1
2
Intuitive parking assist switch
221
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
When the sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approx-
imate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
■Intuitive parking assist display
Rear corner sensor operation
Rear center sensor operation
■Sensor operation and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches an obstacle, as
shown by the following table.
When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer sys-
tem responds to the nearest zone.
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensor
The distance display and buzzer
1
2
Approximate distance to obstacle Display and buzzer
2.8 ft. (85 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) Intermittent
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.3 ft. (40 cm) Fast intermittent
Less than 1.3 ft. (40 cm) Continuously
Approximate distance to obstacle Display and buzzer
5.9 ft. (180 cm) to 3.3 ft. (100 cm) Intermittent
3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.5 ft. (75 cm) Fast intermittent
2.5 ft. (75 cm) to 1.6 ft. (50 cm) Very fast intermittent
Less than 1.6 ft. (50 cm) Continuously
222 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■When multiple obstacles are detected in front and behind the
vehicle at the same time
The buzzer will change in the following manner.
●If an obstacle has been detected within 1.5 ft. (45 cm) of the front
or 2.8 ft. (85 cm) in rear of the vehicle (a continuous buzzer is
sounding), and a new obstacle is detected at the other end of the
vehicle, the buzzer will sound 7 times then 1 continuous buzzer.
●If an obstacle has been detected within 1.5 ft. (45 cm) of the front
or 2.8 ft. (85 cm) in rear of the vehicle (a continuous buzzer is
sounding), and a new obstacle is detected in the same way at the
other end of the vehicle, the buzzer will sound 3 times then 1
continuous buzzer.
■Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 5.9 ft. (180 cm)
Approximately 2.8 ft. (85 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors may not be able to detect
obstacles that are extremely close
to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object, etc.
1
2
223
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position and the shift lever is in R.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the shift lever is in R.
■Sensor detection information
●The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s
rear bumper.
●Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where
this may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve
this problem.)
• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle
engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultra-
sonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the
vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
• A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.
• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of
their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer
than they are.
224 4-5. Using the driving support systems
●The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay
particular attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of
your vehicle
●The following situations may occur during use.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection
distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even
at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the
sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the warning
beep sounds.
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected for colli-
sion when approached, even if they have been detected once.
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air
flow noise of air conditioning system.
■If a message is displayed on the multi-information display
P. 525
■Customization
Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 592)
■Certification (Canada only)
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
225
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
WARNING
■When using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely
and possibly cause an accident.
●Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
●The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When revers-
ing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the
vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s
speed.
●Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.
NOTICE
■When using intuitive parking assist
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a
sensor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
●A beep does not sound when you turn the main switch on.
●The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sounds
when no obstacles are detected.
●If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to
strong impact.
●If the bumper collides with something.
●If the display shows continuously without a beep.
●If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is
likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.
■Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
226 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Rear view monitor system
Vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio
(Audio system types: P. 280)
Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Vehicles with Entune Audio (Audio system types: P. 280)
Vehicles without a smart key sys-
tem:
The rear view monitor system
screen will be displayed if the shift
lever is shifted to R while the
engine switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
The rear view monitor system
screen will be displayed if the shift
lever is shifted to R while the
engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
The rear view monitor system is
canceled when the shift lever
shifted into any position other than
R.
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an
image of the view behind the vehicle with fixed guide lines on
the screen while backing up, for example while parking.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples,
and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the
screen.
227
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Screen description
Vehicle width guide lines
The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
Vehicle center guide line
This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
Distance guide line
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 1.5 ft.
(0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 3 ft.
(1 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.
Using the rear view monitor system
1
2
3
4
228 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Area displayed on screen
The rear view monitor system
displays an image of the view
from the bumper of the rear
area of the vehicle.
The image adjustment proce-
dure for the rear view monitor
system screen is the same as
the procedure for adjusting the
multimedia screen.(P. 292)
• The area displayed on the
screen may vary according to
vehicle orientation conditions.
• Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under
the bumper cannot be seen on
the screen.
• The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that
appears on the screen differs
from the actual distance.
• Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed
by the monitor.
■Rear view monitor system camera
The camera for the rear view
monitor system is located as
shown in the illustration.
Rear view monitor system precautions
229
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
●Using the camera
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is
adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this
case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera
lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
■Differences between the screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not
actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left
and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road sur-
faces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error
between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual dis-
tance/course on the road.
●When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be closer to the vehi-
cle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be farther away than
they actually are. In the same
way, there will be a margin of
error between the guide lines
and the actual distance/course
on the road.
230 4-5. Using the driving support systems
●When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be farther from the
vehicle than the actual dis-
tance. Because of this, objects
will appear to be closer than
they actually are. In the same
way, there will be a margin of
error between the guide lines
and the actual distance/course
on the road.
●When any part of the vehicle sags
When any part of the vehicle
sags due to the number of pas-
sengers or the distribution of
the load, there is a margin of
error between the fixed guide
lines on the screen and the
actual distance/course on the
road.
■When approaching three-dimensional objects
The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced
objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the posi-
tion of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the vehi-
cle width guide lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a
three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed
of a truck), be careful of the following.
231
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
●Distance guidelines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehi-
cle. On the screen, it appears
that a truck is parked at point
. However, in reality if you
back up to point , you will hit
the truck. On the screen, it
appears that is closest and
is farthest away. However,
in reality, the distance to
and is the same, and is
farther than and .
2
1
1
3
1
3 2
1 3
232 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Vehicle width guide lines
Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In
the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the vehi-
cle width guide lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the
truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over
the vehicle width guide lines. In reality if you back up as guided by
the vehicle width guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.
Vehicle width guide lines
233
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause
and the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Things you should know
Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to see
• The vehicle is in a dark area
• The temperature around the lens
is either high or low
• The outside temperature is low
• There are water droplets on the
camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud, etc.) is
adhering to the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are shining
directly into the camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent
lights, sodium lights, mercury
lights, etc.
Back up while visually checking the
vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the
monitor again once conditions have
been improved.)
The procedure for adjusting the pic-
ture quality of the rear view monitor
system is the same as the proce-
dure for adjusting the multimedia
screen. (P. 292)
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adher-
ing to the camera.
Flush the camera with a large quan-
tity of water and wipe the camera
lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding area has
received a strong impact.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
The fixed guide lines are very far out of alignment
• The vehicle is tilted (there is a
heavy load on the vehicle, tire
pressure is low due to a tire punc-
ture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an incline.
If this happens due to these causes,
it does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the
vehicle’s surroundings.
The camera position is out of align-
ment.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
234 4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■When using the rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist
the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to visually check all
around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries.
●Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up.
The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may
differ from the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
●Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle
speed.
●The instructions given are only guidelines.
When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traf-
fic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc., when park-
ing. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view
monitor system.
●When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate
your vehicle before maneuvering into it.
●Do not use the rear view monitor system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or the emergency tire
• When the tailgate is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes
●In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become
faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may
become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check
all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceed-
ing.
●If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixed guide lines displayed
on the screen may change.
●The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and
pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ
from the actual distances. (P. 229)
235
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
NOTICE
■How to use the camera
●The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following
cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the
camera may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassem-
ble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity
of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the cam-
era lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to
transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or a glass coat-
ing to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as pos-
sible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured
on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunc-
tioning.
●Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunc-
tion. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
236 4-5. Using the driving support systems
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;
●The Blind Spot Monitor function
Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes
●The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
Assists the driver when backing up
These functions use same sensors.
BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to
on, the switch’s indicator illuminates and the buzzer sounds. Common
switch for Blind Spot Monitor function and Rear Cross Traffic Alert func-
tion.
Outside rear view mirror indicators
Blind Spot Monitor function:
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror
indicator comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated and the
outside rear view mirror indicator flashes while the turn signal lever is
operated.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function:
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is
detected, the outside rear view mirror indicators flash.
: If equipped
Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor
1
2
237
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
only)
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is
detected, a buzzer sounds from behind the left-hand rear pillar.
■The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility
When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be dif-
ficult to see.
■Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over noises such as
high audio volume.
■When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor system
If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warn-
ing light will be turned on (vehicles without a multi-information display) or
messages will be displayed (vehicles with a multi-information display):
(P. 513, 526)
●There is a malfunction with the sensors
●The sensors have become dirty
●The outside temperature is extremely high or low
●The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: OAYSRR2A
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25 GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
3
238 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Droit applicable : Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes : (1) I’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
I’utilisateur de I’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le founctionnement.
Bandes de fréquences : 24.05 – 24.25 GHz
Puissance émise : Moins de 20 milliwatts
The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles
that are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in
the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of
the vehicles existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.
WARNING
■Handling the radar sensor
One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of
the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the
Blind Spot Monitor system can function correctly.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong
impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may mal-
function and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If
the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have
the area inspected by your Toyota dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on
the bumper.
●Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
●Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
The Blind Spot Monitor function
●Keep the sensor and its surrounding
area on the bumper clean at all times.
239
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m)
from the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the
side of the vehicle is not in the
detection area
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from
the rear bumper
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) for-
ward of the rear bumper
The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas
1
2
3
WARNING
■Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the
driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the
Blind Spot Monitor function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change
lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore
the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
240 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when
●The BSM main switch is set to on.
●Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
■The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when
●A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes the vehicle.
●Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
■Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a
vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types
of vehicles and/or objects:
●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
●Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
●Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
●Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur
■Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not func-
tion correctly
●The Blind Spot Monitor function may not detect vehicles correctly in the fol-
lowing conditions:
• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc.
• When ice or mud, etc., is attached to the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water,
etc.
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and
the vehicle that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the
detection area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip
in the road, etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each
vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far
away from your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle
• When towing anything such as trailer, boat, etc.
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and
the vehicle that enters the detection area
• Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehi-
cle
241
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
●Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehi-
cle and/or object may increase under the following conditions:
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail,
wall, etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following
vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from
your vehicle enters the detection area
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehi-
cle
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse.
It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of
the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehi-
cle’s existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators
and sounding a buzzer.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
Approaching vehicles Detection areas
1 2
242 4-5. Using the driving support systems
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert
for faster vehicles from farther away.
Example:
WARNING
■Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replace-
ment for careful driving. Driver must be careful when backing up, even
when using Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. The driver’s own visual confir-
mation of behind you and your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are
no pedestrians, other vehicles, etc., before backing up. Failure to do so
could cause death or serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore
the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas
Approaching vehicle Speed Approximate
alert distance
Fast 18 mph (28 km/h) 65 ft. (20 m)
Slow 5 mph (8 km/h) 18 ft. (5.5 m)
1
243
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when
●The BSM main switch is set to on.
●The shift lever is in R.
●Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
●Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and
18 mph (28 km/h).
■Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not
detect a vehicle
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following
types of vehicles and/or objects.
●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
●Vehicles approaching from directly behind
●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
●Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
●Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle*
●Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle*
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
■Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not
function correctly
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the
following conditions.
●When ice or mud, etc., is attached to the rear bumper
●During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow, etc.
●When multiple vehicles approach continuously
●Shallow angle parking
●When a vehicle is approaching at high speed
●When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road, etc.
●Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on
●Directly after the engine is started with the BSM main switch on
●When towing a trailer
●Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect
because of obstacles
244 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Four-wheel drive system
Use the front-wheel drive control switch to select the following transfer
modes:
“2WD” (high speed position, two-wheel drive)
Use this for normal driving on dry hard-surfaced roads. This position
gives greater economy, quietest ride and least wear.
“4H” (high speed position, four-wheel drive)
Use this for driving only on tracks that permit the tires slide, like off-road,
icy or snow-covered roads. This position provides greater traction than
two-wheel drive.
The four-wheel drive indicator will come on.
“4L” (low speed position, four-wheel drive)
Use this for maximum power and traction. Use “4L” for climbing or
descending steep hills, off-road driving, and hard pulling in sand, mud or
deep snow.
The four-wheel drive and “4LO” indicator will come on.
: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
3
245
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Shifting from “2WD” to “4H”
Reduce vehicle speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h).
Turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “4H”.
The four-wheel drive indicator will come on.
■Shifting from “4H” to “2WD”
Turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “2WD”.
This can be done at any speed. You need not depress the clutch
pedal. (manual transmission only)
The four-wheel drive indicator will go off.
■Shifting from “4H” to “4L”
Automatic transmission
Stop the vehicle completely and continue to depress the brake
pedal.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Push and turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “4L”.
The “4LO” indicator will come on.
If the four-wheel drive indicator flashes and the buzzer sounds, try the
above steps again.
Manual transmission
Stop the vehicle or reduce your speed to less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Depress and hold the clutch pedal.
Push and turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “4L”.
The “4LO” indicator will come on.
If the four-wheel drive indicator flashes and the buzzer sounds, try the
above steps again.
Shifting between “2WD” and “4H”
Shifting between “4H” and “4L”
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
246 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Shifting from “4L” to “4H”
Automatic transmission
Stop the vehicle completely and continue to depress the brake
pedal.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Push and turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “4H”.
The “4LO” indicator will go off.
If the four-wheel drive indicator flashes and the buzzer sounds, try the
above steps again.
Manual transmission
Stop the vehicle or reduce your speed to less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Depress and hold the clutch pedal.
Push and turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “4H”.
The “4LO” indicator will go off.
If the four-wheel drive indicator flashes and the buzzer sounds, try the
above steps again.
■If the four-wheel drive indicator light or the “4LO” indicator light blinks
●Shifting from “2WD” to “4H”
• If the four-wheel drive indicator continues to blink, drive straight ahead
while accelerating or decelerating.
• If the four-wheel drive indicator continues to blink and the buzzer sounds,
stop the vehicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 62 mph
(100 km/h). Operate the switch again.
●Shifting from “4H” to “2WD”
If the four-wheel drive indicator continues to blink, drive straight ahead
while accelerating or decelerating, or drive forward or backward in a short
distance.
1
2
3
1
2
3
247
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
●Shifting to “4H” or “4L”
Automatic transmission
If the “4LO” indicator continues to blink when you operate the front-wheel
drive control switch to the “4H” or “4L” position, drive forward or backward
in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, shift the shift lever
securely to N and operate the switch again.
Manual transmission
If the “4LO” indicator continues to blink when you operate the front-wheel
drive control switch to the “4H” or “4L” position, drive forward or backward
in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, depress the clutch
pedal and operate the switch again.
If the indicator light continues to blink even if doing so, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the four-wheel drive
system.
■Shifting to “4L”
VSC is automatically turned off.
■Four-wheel drive usage frequency
You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 10 miles (16 km) each month.
This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.
WARNING
■Caution while driving
●Never shift the front-wheel drive control switch from “2WD” to “4H” if the
wheels are slipping.
Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.
●For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, use “2WD” position.
Driving on dry and hard surface roads in “4H” or “4L” position may cause
drive component oil leakage, seizure, or other problems resulting in an
accident. Further, it may cause tire wear and increased fuel consumption.
●Avoid turning suddenly in “4H” or “4L” position. If you do turn suddenly, the
difference in turning speeds between the front and rear wheels may have
a similar effect to braking, thus making driving difficult.
●Do not shift the front-wheel drive control switch when the vehicle is turning
or when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground.
248 4-5. Using the driving support systems
AUTO LSD system
The system can be used on 2WD models and in 2WD mode on 4WD
models.
Press the VSC off switch to turn
on the system.
At this time, the “AUTO LSD” and
VSC off indicators will come on
simultaneously.
To turn off the system, push the
switch again.
If the engine is turned off while the
“AUTO LSD” indicator is on and
then restarted, the indicator will
turn off automatically.
If the rear wheels spin, the slip
indicator flashes to indicate that
the AUTO LSD system has been
controlled the spinning of the rear
wheels.
The AUTO LSD system aids traction by using the traction con-
trol system to control engine performance and braking when
one of the rear wheels begins to spin.
The system should be used only when one of the rear wheels
spinning occurs in a ditch or rough surface.
System operation
When the AUTO LSD system is operating
249
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■If the engine is turned off and restarted
The AUTO LSD system and the indicators are automatically turned off.
■Reactivation of the VSC system linked to vehicle speed
When the AUTO LSD system is turned on, the VSC and TRAC systems will
turn on automatically if vehicle speed increases.
■If the brake system overheats
The system will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal
driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time.
WARNING
■To avoid an accident
●Do not use the AUTO LSD system in conditions other than the above.
A much greater steering effort and more careful cornering control will be
required.
●Do not drive with the AUTO LSD system continuously turned on.
250 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Rear differential lock system
The rear differential lock system is effective in case one of the rear
wheels is spinning.
Press the rear differential lock
switch to lock the rear differential.
At this time, the rear differential
lock indicator will blink. Wait a few
seconds for the system to com-
plete operation. After the rear dif-
ferential is locked, the indicator will
stop blinking and remain on.
To unlock the rear differential,
press the switch again.
Automatic transmission
4WD models: Before using the rear differential lock system.
Stop the vehicle, shift the shift lever to N and turn the front-wheel
drive control switch in the “4L” position to see if this is sufficient. If
this has no effect, additionally use the rear differential lock system.
Be sure to stop the wheels.
Press the rear differential lock switch.
After the rear differential is locked, the indicator will come on.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Unlock the rear differential as soon as the vehicle moves.
To unlock the rear differential, press the switch again.
: If equipped
The rear differential lock system is provided for use only when
wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or rugged sur-
face.
Using the rear differential lock system
1
2
3
4
251
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Manual transmission
4WD models: Before using the rear differential lock system.
Stop the vehicle or reduce your speed to less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Depress the clutch pedal and turn the front-wheel drive control
switch in the “4L” position to see if this is sufficient. If this has no
effect, additionally use the rear differential lock system.
Be sure to stop the wheels.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Press the rear differential lock switch.
After the rear differential is locked, the indicator will come on.
Slowly release the clutch pedal.
Unlock the rear differential as soon as the vehicle moves.
To unlock the rear differential, press the switch again.
■Locking the rear differential
●When the rear differential is locked, VSC is automatically turned off.
(The rear differential lock and VSC off indicators come on.)
●The following systems do not operate when the rear differential is locked. It
is normal operation for the ABS warning light and VSC off indicator to be on
at this time.
•ABS
• Multi Terrain ABS (if equipped)
• Brake assist system
•VSC
•TRAC
• Hill-start assist control (if equipped on 4WD models)
■The rear differential lock is disengaged when
●Vehicles without a smart key system: When the engine switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position
●Vehicles with a smart key system: When the engine switch is turned off
●4WD models only: Turn the front-wheel drive control switch to “2WD” or “4H”
position.
Never forget to turn off the switch after using this feature.
■After unlocking the rear differential
Vehicles without a smart key system
To check that the indicator goes off, turn the engine switch to the “ON” posi-
tion, but do not start the engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system
To check that the indicator goes off, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON
mode, but do not start the engine.
1
2
3
4
5
252 4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■To avoid an accident
●Do not use the rear differential lock system except when wheel spinning
occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or ragged surface. Large steering effort
and careful cornering control will be required.
●Do not lock the rear differential until the wheels have stopped spinning.
Otherwise, the vehicle may move in an unexpected direction when the dif-
ferential lock is engaged, resulting in an accident. This may also lead to
possible damage to differential lock component parts.
●Do not drive over 5 mph (8 km/h) when the differential is locked.
●Do not keep driving with the rear differential lock switch on.
253
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Active traction control system
Stop the vehicle or reduce your speed to less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Depress the clutch pedal and turn the front-wheel drive control
switch in the “4L” position.
Press the “A-TRAC” switch to
activate the system.
At this time, the “A-TRAC” indicator
will come on.
To cancel the system, press the
switch again.
If four wheels spin, the slip indica-
tor flashes to indicate that the
active traction control system has
been engaged.
: If equipped
The active traction control system automatically helps prevent
the spinning of 4 wheels when the vehicle is started or acceler-
ated on slippery road surfaces.
System operation
1
2
When the active traction control system is operating
254 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■When the rear differential is locked (vehicles with the rear differential
lock system)
The active traction control system is activated only when the vehicle speed is
less than 3 mph (6 km/h).
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the active traction control system
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate
that a malfunction has occurred in the system.
●Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. It may occur
when the system is operating.
■If the brake system overheats
The system will cease operation, a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. Stop
the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driv-
ing.)
The system will be automatically restored after a short time.
WARNING
■The active traction control system may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the active traction control system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
255
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Multi-terrain Select
Select a mode that most closely matches the type of terrain on which
you are driving from among 5 modes.
Brake control can be optimized in accordance with the selected mode.
Multi-terrain Select on/off switch
Mode selector dial
Multi-terrain Select indicator
Multi-terrain Select indicator comes on when operating.
Mode indicator
Multi-information display
Displays status information including operating status and road type selec-
tion.
: If equipped
Multi-terrain Select is a system that improves driveability in off-
road situations.
Multi-terrain Select switch/indicators
1
2
3
4
5
256 4-5. Using the driving support systems
A mode which matches the road
conditions can be selected from
among the following 5 modes.
Selectable modes
Position Symbol Mode Road conditions
“Mud & Sand”
Suitable for muddy roads, sandy
roads, snow-covered roads, dirt
trails and other slippery or dirty
conditions
“Loose Rock”
Suitable for slippery conditions
consisting of mixtures of earth and
loose rock
“Mogul” Suitable for very bumpy road con-
ditions, such as mogul roads
“Rock & Dirt”
Suitable for very bumpy road con-
ditions, such as mogul or rocky
roads
“Rock” Suitable for rocky terrain
1
2
3
4
5
257
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Operate the Multi-terrain Select
mode selector dial during Multi-
terrain Select control to select a
mode.
■The Multi-terrain Select can be operated when
●The four-wheel drive control switch is in “4L” position.
●The Crawl Control is off.
■When using the Multi-terrain Select
The VSC system cannot be switched on or off.
A message will be shown on the multi-information display stating that this
function cannot be switched using the VSC off switch.
■When it is difficult to generate traction
“MUD & SAND” mode provides the largest amount of tire slippage, followed
by “LOOSE ROCK”, “MOGUL”, “ROCK & DIRT” and “ROCK” mode.
If the current tires slip is too large, driveability can be improved by selecting a
mode with a smaller slip amount. Conversely, selecting a mode with a larger
slip can improve driveability, if the current tire slip is too small.
■When the vehicle is stuck
Switching the transfer and differentials
For the operation of following function, refer to the following pages.
●Four-wheel drive system (P. 244)
●Rear differential lock (P. 250)
Selecting modes
258 4-5. Using the driving support systems
■When the active traction control operates continuously
P. 254
■When the four-wheel drive control switch is in “4L” position
If the Multi-terrain Select system is not operating and the four-wheel drive
control switch is in “4L”, the “TRAC OFF” indicator will come on.
■When there is a malfunction in the system
The slip indicator light will come on. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toy-
ota dealer immediately.
WARNING
■When using Multi-terrain Select
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries:
●There is a chance that the selected mode may not be the most appropriate
in terms of road conditions such as pitch, slipperiness, undulation, etc.
(P. 256)
●Multi-terrain Select is not intended to expand the limits of the vehicle.
Check the road conditions thoroughly beforehand, and drive safely and
carefully.
NOTICE
■Precaution for use
The Multi-terrain Select is intended for use during off-road driving. Do not
use the system at any other time.
259
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Crawl Control
Speed selector dial
Turn the dial clockwise to increase the speed and counterclockwise to
decrease the speed.
Crawl Control on/off switch
The Crawl Control indicator comes on and the slip indicator flashes when
operating.
Crawl Control indicator
Slip indicator
Multi-information display
The operating status and speed select status of the Crawl Control are
shown on the multi-information display.
: If equipped
Allows travel on extremely rough off-road surfaces at a fixed low
speed without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal. Mini-
mizes loss of traction or vehicle slip when driving on slippery
road surfaces, allowing for stable driving.
Crawl Control switch
1
2
3
4
5
260 4-5. Using the driving support systems
The following table shows some
typical terrains and the recom-
mended speed modes.
Press the Crawl Control on/off switch while Crawl Control is operating.
If the switch is turned off, the slip indicator will turn off, the Crawl Con-
trol indicator will flash until the system has turned off completely, and
a message stating that Crawl Control has been turned off will be dis-
played on the multi-information display for several seconds.
When turning off Crawl Control while driving, stop the vehicle before
the Crawl Control indicator turns off, or drive extremely carefully.
■Crawl Control can be operated when
●The engine is running.
●The shift lever is in any position other than P or N.
●The front-wheel drive control switch is turned to “4L”.
●The driver’s door is closed.
Speed modes
Position Speed mode Road conditions
Low Rock, mogul (downhill) and gravel
(downhill)
Between low and medium
Mogul (uphill)
Medium
Snow, mud, gravel (uphill), sand,
dirt, mogul (uphill) and grass
Between medium and
high
High
1
2
3
4
5
When the system is turned off
261
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Automatic system cancelation
In the following situations, the buzzer will sound intermittently and Crawl Con-
trol will be canceled automatically. In this event, the Crawl Control indicator
will flash and then goes off, and a message stating that Crawl Control has
been turned off will be displayed on the multi-information display for several
seconds.
●When the shift lever is shifted to P or N
●When the front-wheel drive control switch is turned to “4H”
●When the driver’s door is opened
■Function limitations
When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km), engine con-
trol and brake control will stop temporarily. In this event, the Crawl Control
indicator will flash.
■When the Crawl Control system is operated continuously
●If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the buzzer will sound, a
malfunction notification will be displayed on the multi-information display,
the Crawl Control indicator goes off, and Crawl Control will be temporarily
inoperable as a result of the brake system overheating. In this event, stop
the vehicle immediately in a safe place, and allow the brake system to cool
down sufficiently until the “TRAC OFF” indicator will goes off. (In the mean-
time, normal driving is possible.)
●If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the buzzer will sound,
the system will be temporarily canceled, and a malfunction notification will
be displayed on the multi-information display as a result of the automatic
transmission system overheating. Stop the vehicle in a safe place until the
display goes off.
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the Crawl Control system
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate
that a malfunction has occurred in Crawl Control system.
●Either of the following conditions may occur when the Crawl Control system
is operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
■When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on. (P. 519)
262 4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■When using Crawl Control
Do not rely solely on Crawl Control. This function does not extend the vehi-
cle’s performance limitations. Always check the terrain thoroughly and drive
safely.
■These conditions may cause the system may not operate correctly
When driving on the following surfaces, the system may not be able to
maintain a fixed low speed, which may result in an accident:
●Extremely steep inclines
●Extremely uneven surfaces
●Snow-covered roads, or other slippery surfaces
263
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Clutch start cancel switch
Never use the switch for normal engine starting. Be sure to follow the
starting procedure. (P. 187)
Press the “CLUTCH START CAN-
CEL” switch to cancel the clutch
start system when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion.
The indicator comes on when the
clutch start system is canceled.
The clutch start cancel switch is
automatically turned off when the
engine switch is turned off.
■Clutch start system
The system is designed to keep the starter motor from operating if the clutch
pedal is not depressed all the way down.
: If equipped
The switch allows the vehicle to be driven out of difficult situa-
tions by cranking the engine with the clutch engaged.
264 4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving assist systems
◆ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly,
or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
◆Multi Terrain ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) (if equipped)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly,
or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface,
or in off-road conditions (such as rough roads, sand and mud)
◆Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal
is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
◆VSC (Vehicle Stability)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or
turning on slippery road surfaces
◆Trailer Sway Control (if equipped)
Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake
pressure for individual wheels and reducing engine torque when
trailer sway is detected.
Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if
VSC system is turned off or experiences a malfunction.
◆TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from
spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following
systems operate automatically in response to various driving
situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supple-
mentary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operat-
ing the vehicle.
265
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
◆Hill-start assist control (if equipped)
Helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when starting on
an incline or slippery slope
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway
Control/hill-start assist control*
systems are operating.
*: If equipped with Multi-terrain Select/
Crawl Control.
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC/VSC/Trailer
Sway Control systems may reduce power from the engine to the
wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the
vehicle in order to free it.
■Turning off TRAC (turn on the AUTO LSD system)
P. 24 8
■Turning off TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control
Press and hold the VSC off
switch for more than 3 seconds
while the vehicle is stopped to
turn off TRAC, VSC and Trailer
Sway Control.
The VSC off and “TRAC OFF”
indicators will come on.
Press the switch again to turn
the system back on.
When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control/hill-start assist control
systems are operating
Disabling the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems (2WD
models and 2WD mode on 4WD models)
266 4-5. Using the driving support systems
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC/VSC/Trailer
Sway Control systems may reduce power from the engine to the
wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the
vehicle in order to free it.
■Turning off TRAC
Quickly press and release the
VSC off switch to turn off
TRAC.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator will
come on.
Press the switch again to turn
the system back on.
■Turning off TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control
Press and hold the VSC off
switch for more than 3 seconds
while the vehicle is stopped to
turn off TRAC, VSC and Trailer
Sway Control.
The VSC off and “TRAC OFF”
indicators will come on.
Press the switch again to turn
the system back on.
■When the “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on even if the VSC off
switch has not been pressed
TRAC and hill-start assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota
dealer.
Disabling the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems (4WD
mode on 4WD models)
267
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, Multi Terrain ABS, brake
assist, VSC, TRAC and Trailer Sway Control systems
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal
is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■Automatic reactivation of TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems
after turning off the engine
Turning off the engine after turning off the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Con-
trol systems will automatically reactivate them.
■Automatic reactivation of TRAC system (AUTO LSD mode)
With AUTO LSD mode, VSC off and “AUTO LSD” indicator lights turn on.
The VSC and TRAC systems will turn on when the vehicle speed increases.
■Automatic reactivation of TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems
If the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems are turned off, automatic
reactivation will not occur when vehicle speed increases
■If the brake system overheats
TRAC will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. Stop
the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driv-
ing.)
■Operating conditions of hill-start assist control
When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will
operate:
●The shift lever is in a position other than P or N (when starting off forward/
backward on an upward incline).
●The vehicle is stopped.
●The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
●The parking brake is not engaged.
■Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:
●The shift lever is moved to P or N.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed.
●The parking brake is engaged.
●Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.
268 4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as
excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■Stopping distance when the ABS or Multi Terrain ABS is operating may
exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS and Multi Terrain ABS are not designed to shorten the vehicle’s
stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you, especially in the following situations:
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be
lost.
■Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when
●Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may
not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
●Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the
vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may
lead to an accident.
■When the VSC and Trailer Sway Control are activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving
force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control systems off unless
necessary.
269
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
WARNING
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, Multi Terrain ABS, TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems
will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
■Trailer Sway Control precaution
The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situ-
ations. Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle,
trailer, road surface, and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control sys-
tem may not be effective. Refer to your trailer owner’s manual for informa-
tion on how to tow your trailer properly.
■If trailer sway occurs
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
●Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle
and trailer should stabilize. (P. 183)
270 4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips
●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tempera-
tures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.
Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away
the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
●Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accu-
mulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the
tires or on the brakes.
●Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before
getting in the vehicle.
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road con-
ditions.
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before
driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a man-
ner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter
Before driving the vehicle
When driving the vehicle
271
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic transmis-
sion) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being
released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding
or creeping.
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
(0.2 in. [5 mm] in diameter)
Cross chain
(0.25 in. [6.3 mm] in diameter)
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
■Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
●Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4 1/2 mile (0.5 1.0 km).
●Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
When parking the vehicle
Selecting tire chains
1
2
Regulations on the use of tire chains
272 4-6. Driving tips
WARNING
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
●Use tires of the specified size.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
●4WD models: Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns
or treadwear.
■Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine braking.
●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legiti-
mate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-
tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
273
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
Off-road precautions
●Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this
type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
●An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road allowing you to anticipate problems.
●It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary pas-
senger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause the vehicle to rollover.
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has
higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the
height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in
a wide variety of off-road applications.
Off-road vehicle features
274 4-6. Driving tips
When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following pre-
cautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the clo-
sure of areas to off-road vehicles.
●Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permit-
ted to travel.
●Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering
private property.
●Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs
that restrict travel.
●Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving tech-
niques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to
roads.
WARNING
■Off-road vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, seri-
ous injury or damage to your vehicle:
●In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should always fasten their seat belts.
●Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
●Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicle’s center of
gravity.
●Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher
center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordi-
nary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
●When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss
of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also
risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
●Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle)
can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.
Off-road driving
275
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
■Additional information for off-road driving
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road,
consult the following organizations.
●State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
●State Motor Vehicle Bureau
●Recreational Vehicle Clubs
●U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
WARNING
■Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, seri-
ous injury or damage to your vehicle:
●Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving
in dangerous places.
●Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump
could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and espe-
cially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.
●Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.
●After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that
there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc., adhering or trapped
on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the
vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody,
a breakdown or fire could occur.
●When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss
of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also
risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
276 4-6. Driving tips
NOTICE
■To prevent the water damage
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does not occur.
●Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
●Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ulti-
mately damage.
●Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and pre-
mature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and
transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
■When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check
the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive
slowly and avoid deep water.
■Inspection after off-road driving
●Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake
discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system compo-
nents.
●Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driv-
ing that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
277
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
278
5-1. Basic Operations
Audio system types........... 280
Audio system .................... 282
Steering wheel audio
switches .......................... 284
USB Port/AUX Port ........... 285
Basic audio operations...... 286
5-2. Setup
Setup menu....................... 288
General settings................ 289
Audio settings ................... 291
Display settings................. 292
Voice settings.................... 293
5-3. Using the multimedia
system
Selecting the audio
source ............................. 294
List screen operation......... 295
Optimal use of
the multimedia system .... 297
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation................. 298
279
5
Multimedia
5-5. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation .......... 300
5-6. Using an external device
Listening to an iPod .......... 305
Listening to a USB
memory device................ 309
Using the AUX port ........... 313
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Preparations to use
wireless
communication................ 314
Registering a Bluetooth®
audio player
for the first time ............... 320
Registering a Bluetooth®
phone for the first time ... 321
Registering a Bluetooth®
device.............................. 322
Connecting a Bluetooth®
device.............................. 324
Displaying a Bluetooth®
device details .................. 326
Detailed Bluetooth®
system settings ............... 327
5-8. Bluetooth® audio
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio ............................... 328
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Using a Bluetooth®
phone.............................. 329
Making a call ..................... 331
Receiving a call................. 334
Speaking on the phone..... 335
Bluetooth® phone
message function............ 338
Using the steering wheel
switches .......................... 342
Bluetooth® phone
settings ........................... 343
Contact/Call History
Settings........................... 345
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)............ 354
5-10.Bluetooth®
Bluetooth®......................... 358
5-11.Using the voice
command system
Voice command system.... 363
280 5-1. Basic Operations
Audio system types
Entune Audio
P. 2 82
Entune Audio Plus
Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
281
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Multimedia
Entune Premium Audio
Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
282 5-1. Basic Operations
Audio system
button
Press this button to access the Bluetooth® hands-free system.
(P. 329)
“SETUP” button
Press this button to customize the function settings. (P. 288)
“AUDIO” button
Display the “Select Audio Source” screen or audio top screen.
(P. 294)
Operations such as listening to audio, using the hands-free
phone and changing multimedia system settings are started by
using the following buttons.
Audio system operation buttons
1
2
3
283
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Multimedia
By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the multime-
dia system, etc.
■Drag*
Touch the screen with your finger, and move the screen to the
desired position.
●Scrolling the lists
■Flick*
Touch the screen with your finger and then quickly move the screen
by flicking your finger.
●Scrolling the main screen page
*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
■When using the touch screen
●If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be
operating slightly slower than normal.
●The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sun-
glasses. Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display
Settings” screen (P. 292) or remove your sunglasses.
●Flick operations may not be performed smoothly in high altitudes.
Operating the touch screen
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the touch screen
●To prevent damaging the screen, lightly touch the screen buttons with your
finger.
●Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.
●Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical
cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.
284 5-1. Basic Operations
Steering wheel audio switches
Radio mode:
• Press: Selects a radio station
• Press and hold: Seeks up/
down
CD, MP3/WMA disc, Blue-
tooth®, iPod or USB mode:
• Press: Selects a track/file/
song
• Press and hold: Fast-forward/rewind
Volume switch
• Increases/decreases volume
• Press and hold: Continuously increases/decreases volume
“MODE/HOLD” switch
• Changes audio source
• Press and hold this switch to mute or pause the current operation
To cancel the mute or pause, press and hold.
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on
the steering wheel.
Operation may differ depending on the type of multimedia sys-
tem or navigation system. For details, refer to the manual pro-
vided with the multimedia system or navigation system.
Operating the multimedia system using the steering wheel
switches
1
WARNING
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
2
3
285
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Multimedia
USB Port/AUX Port
■iPod
Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
■USB memory
Open the cover and connect the USB memory device.
Turn on the power of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.
■Portable audio player
Open the cover and connect the portable audio player.
Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on.
Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player
to the USB/AUX port as indicated below. Select “iPod”, “USB” or
“AUX” on the “Select Audio Source” screen and the device can
be operated via multimedia system.
Connecting using the USB/AUX port
Type A Type B
WARNING
■While driving
Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.
286 5-1. Basic Operations
Basic audio operations
Press this button to eject a disc
Insert a disc into the disc slot
Audio source selection screen appears (P. 294)
Turn this knob to select radio station bands, tracks and files. Also
the knob can be used to select items in the list display.
Press the “SEEK>” or “<TRACK” button to seek up or down for a
radio station, or to access a desired track or file.
Press to pause or resume playing music.
Setting the Sound (P. 297)
Pause or resume playing music
Select to enable repeat play
Select to enable random playback
Press: Turns the multimedia system on and off.
Turn: Adjusts the volume.
Basic audio operations and functions common to each mode are
explained in this section.
Operating the multimedia system
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
287
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Multimedia
■Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the multimedia system’s speakers if a cel-
lular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the multimedia
system is operating.
WARNING
■For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
●Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment would void
the user’s authority to operate this device.
●Laser products
CAUTION: THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS I LASER PRODUCT.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF
PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY
RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO NOT OPEN
COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR BY YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so
that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassem-
ble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser
rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL
INCREASE EYE HAZARD.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the multimedia system on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
■To avoid damaging the multimedia system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the multimedia system.
288 5-2. Setup
Setup menu
Press the “SETUP” button to display the “Setup” screen.
Select to adjust the settings for
operation sounds, screen ani-
mation, etc. (P. 289)
Select to set the voice settings.
(P. 293)
Select to adjust the settings for
contrast and brightness of the
screen. (P. 292)
Select to adjust the settings for registering, removing, connecting
and disconnecting Bluetooth® devices. (P. 327)
Select to adjust the settings for phone sound, contact, etc.
(P. 345)
Select to set audio settings. (P. 291)
Select to turn the screen off.
You can adjust the multimedia system to your desired settings.
Display “Setup” screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
289
5-2. Setup
5
Multimedia
General settings
Press the “SETUP” button.
Select “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
Select to adjust the clock.
(P. 290)
“English”, “Français” or
“Español” can be selected.
On/off can be selected to
sound beeps.
Select to change the screen
color.
Select to change the key-
board layout.
The animation effect for the
screen can be set to on/off.
Select to delete personal
data (P. 290)
Select to update program versions. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
Select to display the software information. Notices related to third
party software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes
instructions for obtaining such software, where applicable.)
■To return to the default volume settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
Settings are available for adjusting the operation sounds,
screen animation, etc.
Screen for general settings
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
290 5-2. Setup
Select “Clock” on the “General Settings” screen.
Adjust the time, then select
“OK”.
Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select “Delete”.
Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.
A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.
The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default
settings.
• General settings
• Audio settings
• Phone settings
Setting the clock
1
2
Delete personal data
1
2
3
291
5-2. Setup
5
Multimedia
Audio settings
Press the “SETUP” button.
Select “Audio” on the “Setup”
screen.
Number of Radio Presets
Select the number of radio
preset stations.
Display Cover Art on/off
Automatic Sound Levelizer
Select “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.
Select “High”, “Mid”, “Low” or “Off”.
■About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehi-
cle speed.
Settings are available for adjusting the radio operation, cover
art, etc.
Screen for audio settings
1
2
1
2
3
Automatic sound leveliser (ASL)
1
2
292 5-2. Setup
Display settings
Press the “SETUP” button.
Select “Display” on the “Setup”
screen.
Adjust screen contrast/bright-
ness
Adjust screen contrast/bright-
ness of the rear view monitor
camera
Changes to day mode.
Select “General” or “Camera” on the “Display Settings” screen.
Adjust the display as desired by selecting “+” or “-”.
When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.
However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day
Mode”.
The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until
“Day Mode” is selected again.
Settings are available for adjusting the contrast and brightness
of the screen.
Screen for display settings
1
2
1
2
3
Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness
Day mode
1
2
293
5-2. Setup
5
Multimedia
Voice settings
Adjust the voice guidance vol-
ume setting.
Set the voice recognition
prompts “High”, “Low” or “Off”.
Set the train voice recognition.
Set the voice prompt interrupt
on/off.
Set the voice recognition tuto-
rial
■To return to the default volume settings
Select “Default” and then “Yes”
This screen is used for guidance for voice command systems
setting.
1
2
3
4
5
294 5-3. Using the multimedia system
Selecting the audio source
Press the “AUDIO” button to display the audio source selection
screen.
If the audio source selection screen is not displayed, press the “AUDIO”
button again.
Select the desired audio
source.
Select the desired audio
source then or to
reorder.
The audio source changes as follows each time the “MODE/HOLD”
switch is pressed.
Switching between audio sources such as radio and CD are
explained in this section.
Selecting the audio source
1
2
1
Using the steering wheel switches to change audio source
295
5-3. Using the multimedia system
5
Multimedia
“List screen operation
: Select to scroll to the next
or previous page.
: If appears to the right of
titles, the complete titles are
too long for the display. Select
this button to scroll the title.
Turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob
to move the cursor box to select a
desired item from the list, and
press the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob
to play it. The track that is being
played is highlighted.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
When a list screen is displayed, use the appropriate buttons to
scroll through the list.
How to scroll
296 5-3. Using the multimedia system
■Selecting a track/file/song
Press the “SEEK>” or “<TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob to select the desired track/file/song number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold the “SEEK>” or
“<TRACK” button.
■Selecting a track/file/song from the track/file/song list
Select “Browse” or cover art.
Select the desired track/file/
song.
When an MP3/WMA/AAC disc or USB memory device is being used,
the folder can be selected. When a Bluetooth® device or iPod is being
used, the album can be selected.
According to the audio device, the following is displayed.
Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs
1
2
Audio source List name
Audio CD Track
MP3/WMA/AAC disc Folder, File
Bluetooth®Album, Track
USB Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres,
Composers
iPod Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres,
Composers, Audiobooks, Videos
297
5-3. Using the multimedia system
5
Multimedia
Optimal use of the multimedia system
Select “-” or “+” to adjust
the treble, mid or bass to
a level between -5 and 5.
Select “Front” or “Rear” to
adjust the front/rear audio
balance.
Select “L” or “R” to adjust the
left/right audio balance.
■The sound quality level is adjusted individually
The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for each audio mode sepa-
rately.
On the “Sound Settings” screen, sound quality (Treble/Mid/
Bass), volume balance can be adjusted.
How to adjust the sound settings and sound quality
1 2 3
4 5
6 7
298 5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation
Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from
any screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection screen
appears
Preset stations
Select to display RBDS text
message*
Scanning for receivable station
Select to display a list of receiv-
able stations
Setting the sound (P. 297)
*: FM only
Tune in to the desired station using one of the following methods.
■Seek tuning
Press the “SEEK>” or “<TRACK” button.
The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest
frequency and will stop when a station is found.
■Manual tuning
Turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob.
■Preset stations
Select the desired preset station.
Select “AM” or “FM” on the audio source selection screen to
begin listening to the radio.
Audio control screen
1
2
3
4
5
Selecting a station
6
299
5-4. Using the radio
5
Multimedia
Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob or
pressing the “SEEK>” or “<TRACK” button.
Select “(add new)”
To change the preset station to a different one, select and hold the preset
station.
Select “Yes”.
Select “OK” after setting the new preset station.
■Refreshing the station list
Select “Refresh” on the “Station List” screen.
To cancel the refresh, select “Cancel Refresh”.
■Reception sensitivity
●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continu-
ally changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and sur-
rounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●The radio antenna is mounted on the roof.
Setting station presets
1
2
3
4
300 5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation
Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from
any screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection screen
appears
Displaying the track/file list
MP3/WMA/AAC
Displaying the folder list
Random playback
Repeat play
Pause
Select to resume play
Setting the sound (P. 297)
■Displaying the title and artist name
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed.
■Error messages
If an error message is displayed, refer to the following table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your
Toyota dealer.
Insert disc or select “CD” on the audio source selection screen
with a disc inserted to begin listening to a CD.
Audio control screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
Message Cause Correction procedures
“Check DISC”
• The disc is dirty or
damaged.
• The disc is inserted
upside down.
• The disc is not play-
able with the player.
• Clean the disc.
• Insert the disc cor-
rectly.
• Confirm the disc is
playable with the
player.
“Disc Error” There is a malfunction
within the system. Eject the disc.
“No music files found.” No playable data is
included on the disc. Eject the disc.
301
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
5
Multimedia
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■If a disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■MP3, WMA and AAC files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft
Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside
of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized
Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 for-
mat.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression
technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-
aural
302 5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)
●AAC file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MPEG4/AAC-LC
• Compatible sampling frequencies
11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
16-320 (kbps)
Compatible channel modes: 1ch and 2ch
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback are CD-Rs and
CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is
not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the
disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
UDF (2.01 or lower)
MP3, WMA and AAC files written in any format other than those listed
above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may
not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are
those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
●Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the multimedia system is compatible with multi session discs, it is possi-
ble to play discs that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. However, only the
first session can be played.
303
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
5
Multimedia
●ID3, WMA and AAC tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●MP3, WMA and AAC playback
When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the
disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or
AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recom-
mend you do not write any files to the disc other than MP3, WMA or AAC
files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format
data cannot be played.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than
MP3, WMA and AAC files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played
as MP3, WMA and AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interfer-
ence and damage to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3,
WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it
may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback
may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
304 5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
NOTICE
■Discs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs.
Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters, Dual Discs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
●Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm).
●Low-quality or deformed discs.
●Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.
●Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that
have had the label peeled off.
■Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or
the player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
●Do not apply oil to the player.
●Store discs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
305
5-6. Using an external device
5
Multimedia
Listening to an iPod
P. 2 85
Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from
any screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection screen
appears
Displays cover art
Selecting the play mode
Shuffle play
Repeat play
Pause
Select to resume playback
Setting the sound (P. 297)
Select “Browse” on the screen.
Select the desired play mode. Then select a song to begin using
the selected play mode.
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
Select “iPod” on the audio source selection screen.
When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the
system can only output the sound by selecting the browse
screen.
Connecting an iPod
Audio control screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
Selecting a play mode
7
1
2
306 5-6. Using an external device
■About iPod
●“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory
has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone respectively,
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance stan-
dards.
●Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this acces-
sory with iPod and iPhone may affect wireless performance.
●iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trade-
mark of Apple Inc.
■iPod cover art
●Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be dis-
played.
●This function can be changed to on/off. (P. 291)
●It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated
while the cover art display is in process.
●Only iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed.
■iPod functions
●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and recon-
necting it may resolve the problem.
●While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own
controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s multimedia sys-
tem instead.
●When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If
so, charge the iPod before use.
●Compatible models (P. 308)
307
5-6. Using an external device
5
Multimedia
■iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on
how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.
■Error messages
Message Cause/Correction procedures
“Connection error. Please
consult your Owner’s Man-
ual for instructions on how
to connect the iPod.”
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its con-
nection.
“No music files found.” This indicates that there is no music data in
the iPod.
“No videos found.” This indicates that no video files are included
in the iPod.
“There are no songs avail-
able for playback. Please
add compatible files to
your iPod.”
This indicates that songs are not found in a
selected playlist.
“iPod authorization unsuc-
cessful.”
This indicates that the display multimedia sys-
tem failed to authorize the iPod.
Please check your iPod.
308 5-6. Using an external device
■Compatible models
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone®
devices can be used with this system.
●Made for
• iPod touch (5th generation)
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (7th generation)
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPhone 6 Plus
• iPhone 6
• iPhone 5s
• iPhone 5c
• iPhone 5
• iPhone 4S
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some
models might be incompatible with this system.
WARNING
■While driving
Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminals
●Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
309
5-6. Using an external device
5
Multimedia
Listening to a USB memory device
P. 2 85
Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from
any screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection screen
appears
Displays cover art
Displaying the folder list
Random playback
Repeat play
Pause
Select to resume playback
Setting the sound (P. 297)
Select “Browse” on the screen.
Select the desired play mode. Then select a song to begin using
the selected play mode.
■Displaying the now playing list
Select the cover art display.
■USB memory functions
●Depending on the USB memory device that is connected to the system, the
device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be avail-
able. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a mal-
function (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device
and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.
●If the USB memory device still does not begin operation after being discon-
nected and reconnected, format the memory.
Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy music
from the vehicle speakers.
Select “USB” on the audio source selection screen.
Connecting a USB memory device
Audio control screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Selecting a play mode
1
2
310 5-6. Using an external device
■Error messages for USB memory
■USB memory
●Compatible devices
USB memory device that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback.
●Compatible device formats
The following device format can be used:
• USB communication format: USB2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
• File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3, WMA and AAC files written to a device with any format other than
those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder
names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
●MP3, WMA and AAC files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compres-
sion technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.
Message Cause/Correction procedures
“Connection error. Please
consult your Owner’s Man-
ual for instruction on how to
connect the USB device.”
This indicates a problem with the USB mem-
ory device or its connection.
“There are no files available
for playback. Please add
compatible files to your USB
device.”
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files
are included on the USB memory device.
311
5-6. Using an external device
5
Multimedia
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-
aural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)
●AAC file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MPEG4/AAC-LC
• Compatible sampling frequencies
11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
16-320 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are
those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
●ID3, WMA and AAC tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
312 5-6. Using an external device
●MP3, WMA and AAC playback
• When a device containing MP3, WMA and AAC files is connected, all
files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is fin-
ished, the first MP3, WMA and AAC file is played. To make the file check
finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other
than MP3, WMA and AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When a USB memory device is connected and the audio source is
changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory device will start play-
ing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and
reconnected (and the contents have not been changed), the USB mem-
ory device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than
MP3, WMA and AAC files, they will be skipped (not played).
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3,
WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
WARNING
■While driving
Do not connect a USB memory device or operate the device controls.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals
●Do not leave the USB memory device in the vehicle. The temperature
inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB
memory device.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
device while it is connected.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
313
5-6. Using an external device
5
Multimedia
Using the AUX port
P. 2 85
■Operating portable audio players connected to the multimedia system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio player itself.
■When using a portable audio player connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio player.
To use the AUX port, connect a portable player, press the
“AUDIO” button, then select “AUX” on display the audio control
screen.
Connecting a portable audio player
WARNING
■While driving
Do not connect a portable audio player or operate the device controls.
314 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Preparations to use wireless communica-
tion
■About Bluetooth®
■Certifications for the Bluetooth®
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: ACJ932YEAP01A727
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’ authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION:
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of
7.9 in. (20 cm) between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not
be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmit-
ter.
The following can be performed using Bluetooth® wireless com-
munication:
■A portable audio player can be operated and listened to via
multimedia system
■Hands-free phone calls can be made via a cellular phone
In order to use wireless communication, register and connect a
Bluetooth® device by performing the following procedures.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Panasonic Corporation is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
315
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
5
Multimedia
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’lndustrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number, or model
number if Category II) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with
the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and
required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types
not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indi-
cated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Le présent émetteur radio (identifier le dispositif par son numéro de certifica-
tion ou son numéro de modèle s’il fait partie du matériel de catégorie II) a été
approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d’antenne
énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l’impédance
requise pour chaque type d’antenne. Les types d’antenne non inclus dans
cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont stricte-
ment interdits pour l’exploitation de l’é metteur.
316 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Access to http://www.ptc.panasonic.eu/, enter the below Model No. into the
keyword search box, you can download the latest “DECLARATION of CON-
FORMITY” (DoC).
Model No. YEAP01D104
317
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
5
Multimedia
318 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Device registration/connection flow
1. Register the Bluetooth® device to be used with multimedia
system (P. 320, 321, 322)
2. Connect the Bluetooth® device to be used
(P. 324)
To be used for audio To be used for hands-free
phone
3. Start Bluetooth® connec-
tion (P. 324)
3. Start Bluetooth® connec-
tion (P. 324)
4. Check connection status
(P. 328)
4. Check connection status
(P. 330)
5. Use Bluetooth® audio
(P. 328)
5. Use Bluetooth® phone
(P. 329)
319
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
5
Multimedia
To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button and
select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen.
Select to connect the device to
be used with multimedia sys-
tem. (P. 324)
Select to register a Bluetooth®
device to be used with multime-
dia system. (P. 322)
Select to set detailed
Bluetooth® system settings.
(P. 327)
Select to delete registered devices. (P. 323)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Registering and connecting from the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen
1
2
3
4
320 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Registering a Bluetooth® audio player for
the first time
Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your audio player on.
Press the “AUDIO” button.
Select “ Audio”.
Select “Select Device”.
Follow the steps in “How to register a Bluetooth® device” from step
. (P. 322)
To use the Bluetooth® Audio, it is necessary to register an audio
player with the system.
Once the player has been registered, it is possible to use the
Bluetooth® Audio.
For details about registering a Bluetooth® device (P. 322)
1
2
3
4
5
2
321
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
5
Multimedia
Registering a Bluetooth® phone for the first
time
Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your cellular phone on.
Press the button.
Select “OK” to register a phone.
Follow the steps in “How to register a Bluetooth® device” from step
(P. 322)
To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth® phone with the system.
Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to use the
hands-free system.
For details about registering a Bluetooth® device (P. 322)
1
2
3
4
3
322 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Registering a Bluetooth® device
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 319)
Select “Add Device”.
When this screen is displayed,
search for the name displayed
on this screen on the screen of
your Bluetooth® device.
For details about operating the
Bluetooth® device, see the manual
that comes with it.
To cancel the registration, select
“Cancel”.
Register the Bluetooth® device using your Bluetooth® device.
A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® device being
connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the
Bluetooth® device’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth® device
according to the confirmation message.
Check that this screen is dis-
played when registration is
complete.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP) and portable audio players
(AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5
Bluetooth® devices.
How to register a Bluetooth® device
1
2
3
4
5
323
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
5
Multimedia
Select “OK” when the connection status changes from “Connect-
ing...” to “Connected”.
If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try
again.
Registration can be performed from screens other than the
“Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
■When registering from the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen
Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen. (P. 294)
Select “Select Device”.
Follow the steps in “How to register a Bluetooth® device” from
step (P. 322)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 319)
Select “Remove”.
Select the desired device.
A confirmation message will be displayed, select “Yes” to delete the
device.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is
complete.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Deleting a Bluetooth® device
6
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
4
5
324 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Connecting a Bluetooth® device
Press the “SETUP” button.
Select “Bluetooth*”.
Select the device to be con-
nected.
Supported profile icons will be dis-
played.
Phone
Audio player
Supported profile icons for cur-
rently connected devices will illumi-
nate.
Dimmed icons can be selected to connect to the function directly.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
To turn auto connection mode on, set “Bluetooth* Power” to on.
(P. 327)
When you register a phone, auto connection will be activated. Always
set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where a
connection can be established.
When the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position (vehicles
without a smart key system), or ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with a smart key system), the system will search for a nearby cel-
lular phone you have registered.
Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent of the
phones connected to in the past. Then, the connection result is displayed.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices (Phones [HFP] and audio players
[AVP]) can be registered.
If more than 1 Bluetooth® device has been registered, select
which device to connect to.
1
2
3
1
2
Auto connection
325
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
5
Multimedia
When auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off,
you must connect the Bluetooth® device manually.
●Follow the steps in “Connecting a Bluetooth* device” from step .
(P. 324)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Registering an additional device
Select “Select Device” on the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.
For more information: P. 32 2
Selecting a registered device
Select “Select Device” on the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.
For more information: P. 32 4
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
■Reconnecting a Bluetooth® phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the engine
switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system), or
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), the
system will automatically attempt to reconnect.
If the system is attempting to connect to a Bluetooth® phone and the Bluetooth®
phone is turned off and then back on, the system will attempt to reconnect.
Manual connection
Connecting a Bluetooth® audio player
1
1
2
1
2
326 5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
Displaying a Bluetooth® device details
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 319)
Select the device.
Select “Device Info”.
The following screen is dis-
played:
Device Name
Change connection method
Bluetooth® Address
Display your telephone num-
ber
The number may not be dis-
played depending on the model
of phone.
Compatibility profile of the device
Restore default settings
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Select “Connect Audio Player from”.
Select “Vehicle” or “Device”.
“Vehicle”: Connect the multimedia system to the portable audio player.
“Device”: Connect the portable audio player to the multimedia system.
You can confirm and change the registered device details.
Bluetooth® device registration status
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Changing connection method
1
2
327
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth®
5
Multimedia
Detailed Bluetooth® system settings
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 319)
Select “System Settings”.
The following screen is dis-
played:
Bluetooth* Power on/off
You can change Bluetooth*
function on/off
Bluetooth* Name
Change PIN-code
Bluetooth* Address
Display Phone Status
You can set the system to show
the status confirmation display
when connecting a telephone
Display Audio Player Status
You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when
connecting an audio player
Compatibility profile of the system
Restore default settings
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
You can change the PIN-code that is used to register your Bluetooth®
devices in the system.
Select “Bluetooth* PIN”.
Input a PIN-code, and select “OK”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth® settings.
How to check and change detailed Bluetooth® settings
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
Editing the Bluetooth® PIN
6
7
8
1
2
328 5-8. Bluetooth® audio
Listening to Bluetooth® audio
Some titles and controls may not be displayed depending on the type
of portable audio player used.
Connection status
Battery charge
Select or to Play/Pause.
For details on “Bluetooth* Audio” screen operation methods, refer to
Basic Audio Operations. (P. 286)
For details on how to select a track or album, refer to selecting, fast-
forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs. (P. 296)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
The Bluetooth® audio system enables the user to enjoy music
played on a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wire-
less communication.
When a Bluetooth® device cannot be connected, check the connec-
tion status on the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen. If the device is not con-
nected, either register or reconnect the device. (P. 324)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Audio control screen
1
2
Indicators Conditions
Connection status Good Not connected
Battery charge Full Empty
Playing Bluetooth® audio
329
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
Using a Bluetooth® phone
To display the screen shown below, press the switch on the steer-
ing wheel or press the button.
Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is dis-
played by selecting the 4 tabs.
Device name
Bluetooth® connection status
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your
cellular phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® is a wireless data
system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to
the hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Before making a phone call, check the connection status, battery
charge, call area and signal strength. (P. 330)
If a Bluetooth® device cannot be connected, check the connection
status on the phone screen. If the device is not connected, either
register or reconnect it. (P. 324)
Phone screen
1
2
330 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
■Telephone switch (P. 342)
■Microphone
The vehicle’s built in micro-
phone is used when talking on
the phone.
The person you are speaking to
can be heard from the front
speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth®
phone in the system. (P. 322)
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge
on the phone screen.
Connection status
Signal strength
Battery charge
Status display
1
2
3
Indicators Conditions
Connection status Good Poor Not connected
Battery charge Full Empty
Call area “Rm”: Roaming area
Signal strength Excellent Poor
331
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
Making a call
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter a phone number.
To delete the input phone number, select .
For the first digit, you can enter “+” by selecting “” for a while.
Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .
You can dial a number from the contact data imported from your cellu-
lar phone. The system has one contact for each registered phone. Up
to 2500 contacts may be stored in each contact. (P. 331)
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select “Contacts” tab.
Choose the desired contact to call from the list.
Choose the number and then press the switch on the steering
wheel or select .
You can transfer the phone numbers in a Bluetooth® phone to the sys-
tem.
Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If the cellular
phone does not support either PBAP or OPP (Object Push Profile)
service, you cannot transfer contacts.
Once a Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call
using the following procedure:
Dialing
Dialing from the contacts list
When the contact is empty
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
332 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Press the switch on the steering wheel.
If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed.
For a PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phone and “Automatic Transfer”
is off
Select the desired item.
Select to transfer new con-
tacts from a cellular phone,
select “Always” and then
enable “Automatic Transfer”.
Select to transfer all the con-
tacts from a connected cellu-
lar phone only once.
Select to cancel transferring.
For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones
Select the desired item.
Select to transfer the con-
tacts from the connected cel-
lular phone.
Select to add a new contact
manually.
Select to cancel transferring.
When “Transfer” is selected
Follow the steps in “Update contacts from phone” from step .
(P. 346)
When “Add” is selected
Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list”
from step . (P. 347)
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
3 2
3
2
333
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
You can make a call using numbers registered in the contact.
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select “Favorites” tab.
Select the desired number to make a call.
You can make a call using the call history, which has the 3 functions
below.
: calls which you missed
: calls which you received
: calls which you made
Display the phone top screen. (P. 329)
Select “Call History” tab.
Select or the desired entry from the list.
When is selected
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
When the desired contact is selected
Select the desired number.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
■Call history list
●If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the con-
tacts, the name is displayed in the call history.
●If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is dis-
played in the call history.
■International calls
You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile
phone in use.
Calling using favorites list
Dialing from call history
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
4
5
334 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Receiving a call
Press the switch on the steer-
ing wheel or select .
Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .
Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob. You can also adjust the volume using the
steering switches.
■International calls
Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the
cellular phone in use.
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed
together with a sound.
To answer the phone
To refuse a call
To adjust the incoming call volume
335
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
Speaking on the phone
Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches or the volume knob.
Select “Mute”.
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the contact.
Select “0-9”.
Input the number.
■Release Tones
“Release Tones” appear when a continuous tone signal(s) contain-
ing a (w) is registered in the contact list.
●Select “Release Tones”.
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
To adjust the call volume
To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Inputting tones
1
2
336 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
■Release Tones
●A continuous tone signal is a character string that consists of numbers and
the characters “p” or “w”. (e.g.056133w0123p#1)
●When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone
will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w”
pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be auto-
matically sent after a user operation is performed.
●Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based
service such as an answering machine or bank phone service is desired. A
phone number with continuous tone signals can be registered in the contact
list.
●Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be operated on voice command during
a call.
Select “Handset Mode” to on from a hands-free call to a cellular
phone call.
Select “Handset Mode” to off from a cellular phone call to a hands-free
call.
Select “Transmit Volume”.
Select the desired level for the transmit volume.
Select “OK”.
Press the switch on the steering wheel or select .
To transfer a call
Transmit volume setting
To hang up
1
2
3
337
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, an incoming
call message will be displayed.
To talk with the other party:
• Press the switch on the
steering wheel.
• Select .
To refuse the call:
• Press the switch on the
steering wheel.
• Select .
Every time you press the switch on the steering wheel or select
during call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.
■Transferring calls
●If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen
will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
●Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone
used.
●For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual.
■Call waiting operation
Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cel-
lular phone.
Call waiting
338 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Bluetooth® phone message function
Press the button.
Select .
When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen
pops up with sound and is ready to be operated on the screen.
Select to check the message.
Select to refuse the message.
Select to call the message
sender.
Received messages can be forwarded from the connected
Bluetooth® phone, enabling checking and replying using the
multimedia system.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone connected, received
messages may not be transferred to the message inbox.
If the phone does not support the message function, this func-
tion cannot be used.
Displaying message inbox screen
Receiving a message
1
2
1
2
3
339
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
■Receiving a message
●Depending on the cellular phone used for receiving messages, or its regis-
tration status with the navigation system, some information may not be dis-
played.
●The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/
MMS messages under the following conditions:
E-mail:
• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to “Full Screen”. (P. 352)
• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on. (P. 352)
SMS/MMS:
• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is set to “Full screen”. (P. 352)
• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set to on. (P. 352)
Display the message inbox screen. (P. 338)
Select the desired message from the list.
Check that the message is dis-
played.
E-mails: Select “Mark
Unread” or “Mark Read” to
mark mail unread or read on
the message inbox screen.
This function is available when
“Update Read Status on Phone”
is set to on (P. 352)
Select to make a call to the sender.
Select to have messages read out. To cancel this function, select
“Stop”.
Select to display the previous or next message.
Select to reply the message.
Checking the messages
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
340 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
■Check the messages
●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be nec-
essary to perform additional steps on the phone.
●Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth® phone’s
registered mail address folder.
Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed.
●Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth® phone can be dis-
played.
●The text of the message is not displayed while driving.
●When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to on, messages will be auto-
matically read out. (P. 352)
●Turn the “PWRVOL” knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel
to adjust the message read out volume.
●The message read out function is available even while driving.
Display the message inbox screen. (P. 338)
Select the desired message from the list.
Select “Quick Message”.
Select the desired message.
Select “Send”.
■Editing quick reply message
Select “Quick Message”.
Select corresponding to the desired message to edit.
Select “OK” when editing is completed.
Replying to a message
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
341
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender’s phone
number.
Display the message inbox screen. (P. 338)
Select the desired message.
Select .
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
■Calling from a number within a message
Calls can be made to a number identified in a message’s text area.
Display the message inbox screen. (P. 338)
Select the desired message.
Select the text area.
Select corresponding to the desired number.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
■Calling from the incoming message screen
P. 337
Calling the message sender
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
342 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Using the steering wheel switches
Volume switch
• Increase/Decrease the vol-
ume
• Press and hold:
Continuously increase/
decrease the volume
Off hook switch
• Make a call
• Receive a call
• Display “Phone” screen
On hook switch
• End a call
• Refuse a call
The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected
cellular phone.
Operating a telephone using the steering wheel switches
1
2
3
343
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
Bluetooth® phone settings
To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button, and
select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
Set the phone connection
(P. 322)
Sound Settings (P. 344)
Contact/Call History Settings
(P. 345)
Set the message settings
(P. 352)
Set the phone display
(P. 353)
You can adjust the hands-free system to your desired settings.
“Phone/Message Settings” screen
1
2
13
14
5
344 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (P. 343)
Select “Sound Settings” on the
“Phone/Message Settings”
screen.
Set the desired ringtone.
Adjust the ringtone volume.
Adjust the message readout
volume.
Set the desired incoming
SMS/MMS tone.
Adjust the incoming SMS/
MMS tone volume.
Set the incoming e-mail tone.
Adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume.
Adjust the default volume of the other party’s voice.
■To return to the default volume settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
Sound setting
1
2
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
345
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
Contact/Call History Settings
The contacts can be transferred from a Bluetooth® phone to the sys-
tem. Contacts can also be added, edited and deleted.
The call history can be deleted and contacts and favorites can be
changed.
Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (P. 343)
Select “Contact/Call History Settings”.
Select the desired item to be
set.
For PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones, select to
set “Automatic Transfer” on/
off. When set to on, the
phone’s contact data and his-
tory are automatically trans-
ferred.
Select to update contacts
from the connected phone.
(P. 346)
Select to sort contacts by the first name or last name field.
Select to add contacts to the favorites list. (P. 349)
Select to delete contacts from the favorites list. (P. 351)
Select to display contact images.
Select to clear contacts from the call history.*
Select to add new contacts to the contact list.* (P. 347)
Select to edit contacts in the contact list.* (P. 348)
Select to delete contacts from the contact list.* (P. 349)
Select to reset all setup items.
*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones only, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
346 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP
incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones.
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the con-
tacts cannot be transferred.
■For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® Phones
Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular
phone.
Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be
required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the Blue-
tooth® phone.
If another Bluetooth® device is connected when transferring contact
data, depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth® device may
need to be disconnected.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.
■For PBAP Incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®
Phones
Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.
Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth®
phone.
This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular
phone.
Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be
required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the Blue-
tooth® phone.
To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
Update contacts from phone
1
2
1
2
3
347
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
■Updating the contacts in a different way (from the “Call His-
tory” screen)
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P. 345)
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet regis-
tered in the contact list.
Select “Update Contact”.
Select the desired contact.
Select a phone type for the phone number.
New contact data can be registered. Up to 4 numbers per person can
be registered. For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function
is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P. 345)
Select “New Contact”.
Enter the name and select “OK”.
Enter the phone number and select “OK”.
Select the phone type for the phone number.
To add another number to this contact, select “Yes”.
■Registering a new contact in a different way (from the “Call
History” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet regis-
tered in the contact list.
Select “Add to Contacts”.
Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list”
from step .
Registering a new contact to the contact list
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
2
348 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P. 345)
Select “Edit Contact”.
Select the desired contact.
Select corresponding to the desired name or number.
For editing the name
Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list”
from step . (P. 347)
For editing the number
Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contact list”
from step . (P. 347)
■Editing the contacts in a different way (from the “Contact
Details” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and
select the desired contact.
Select “Edit Contact”.
“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display all registered e-mail addresses for
the contact.
Follow the steps in “Editing the contact data” from step .
Editing the contact data
1
2
3
4
2
4
3
1
2
3
4 3
349
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P. 345)
Select “Delete Contacts”.
Select the desired contact and select “Delete”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
■Deleting the contact in a different way (from the “Contact
Details” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and
select the desired contact.
Select “Delete Contact”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be regis-
tered in the favorites list.
■Registering the contacts in the favorites list
Select “Add Favorite”.
Select the desired contact to add to the favorites list.
Dimmed contacts are already stored as a favorite.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
Deleting the contact data
Favorites list setting
1
2
13
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
350 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list
When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites
list, a registered contact needs to be replaced.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears to replace a
contact.
Select the contact to be replaced.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the
“Contacts” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select the “Contacts” tab.
Select at the beginning of the desired contact list name to be
registered in the favorites list.
When selected, is changed to , and the contact is registered in
the favorites list.
Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the
“Contact Details” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select the “Contacts” tab or the “Call History” tab and select the
desired contact.
Select “Add Favorite”.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
351
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
■Deleting the contacts in the favorites list
Select “Remove Favorite”.
Select the desired contacts and select “Remove”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the
“Contacts” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select the “Contacts” tab.
Select at the beginning of the contact list name to be deleted
from the favorites list.
When selected, is changed to , and the data is deleted from the
list.
Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the
“Contact Details” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and
select the desired contact to delete.
Select “Remove Favorite”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
352 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (P. 343)
Select “Messaging Settings”.
Select the desired item to be
set.
Set automatic message
transfer on/off.
Set automatic message
readout on/off.
Set the SMS/MMS notifica-
tion popup on/off.
Set the e-mail notification
popup on/off.
Set adding the vehicle signa-
ture to outgoing messages
on/off.
Set updating message read status on phone on/off.
Change the incoming SMS/MMS display.
“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, the incoming
SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the
screen.
“Drop-Down”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, a message is
displayed on the upper side of the screen.
Change the incoming e-mail display.
“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display
screen is the displayed and can be operated on the screen.
“Drop-Down”: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on
the upper side of the screen.
Set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off.
When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellular phone
will be displayed.
■To return to the default volume settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
Message Settings
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
353
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
■Displaying the “Messaging Settings” screen in a different way
Display the phone screen. (P. 329)
Select .
Select “Settings”.
Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (P. 343)
Select “Phone Display Settings”.
Select the desired item to be
set.
Change the incoming call
display.
“Full Screen”: When a call is
received, the hands-free screen
is displayed and can be oper-
ated on the screen.
“Drop-Down”: A message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.
Set display of the contact/history transfer completion message
on/off.
Phone Display Settings
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
354 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth®
device, first check the table below.
When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device
The hands-free system or Bluetooth® device does not work.
The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth® cellular phone.
For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed
on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following web-
site: http://www.toyota.com/entune
The Bluetooth version of the connected cellular phone may be older than
the specified version.
Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth version 2.0 or higher (recom-
mended: Ver. 3.0 with EDR or higher). (P. 358)
355
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
When registering/connecting a cellular phone
When making/receiving a call
A cellular phone cannot be registered.
An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone.
Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.
The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone
side.
Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve
registration on the phone).
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Delete the existing registration information from both this system
and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to
connect to this system. (P. 323)
A Bluetooth® connection cannot be made.
Another Bluetooth® device is already connected.
Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this sys-
tem. (P. 325)
Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.
“Please check your device settings.” message is displayed.
Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Delete the existing registration information from both this system
and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to
connect to this system. (P. 323)
A call cannot be made/received.
Your vehicle is in a “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.”
area.
Move to where “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.”
no longer appears on the display.
356 5-9. Bluetooth® phone
When using the phonebook
When using the Bluetooth® message function
Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.
The profile version of the connected cellular phone may not be compatible
with transferring phonebook data.
For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed
on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following web-
site: http://www.toyota.com/entune
Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to off.
Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to on.
(P. 345)
Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone.
Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default pass-
code: 1234).
Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed.
Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve trans-
fer operation on the phone).
Phonebook data cannot be edited.
Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to on.
Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to off.
(P. 345)
Messages cannot be viewed.
Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message
transfer on the phone).
Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off.
Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (P. 352)
New message notifications are not displayed.
Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off.
Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on.
(P. 352)
Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.
357
5-9. Bluetooth® phone
5
Multimedia
In other situations
Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom sta-
tus does not change.
The cellular phone is not close enough to this system.
Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.
The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.
Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack,
and then restart the cellular phone.
Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth® connection.
Stop the cellular phone’s security software and close all applica-
tions.
Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, care-
fully check its source and how its operation might affect this sys-
tem.
358 5-10. Bluetooth®
Bluetooth®
■When using the Bluetooth® audio system
●In the following conditions, the system may not function.
• If the portable audio player is turned off
• If the portable audio player is not connected
• If the portable audio player’s battery is low
●There may be a delay if a cellular phone connection is made during
Bluetooth® audio play.
●Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the sys-
tem, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.
■When using the hands-free system
●The multimedia system is muted when making a call.
●If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
●If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
If the Bluetooth® phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may
deteriorate and connection status may deteriorate.
●In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If a roof or window is open
• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• If there is interference from the network of the cellular phone
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
●If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®
●If the cellular phone is turned off
●If you are outside of cellular phone service coverage
●If the cellular phone is not connected
●If the cellular phone’s battery is low
●When outgoing calls are controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines,
etc.
●When the cellular phone itself cannot be used
●When transferring contact data from the cellular phone
359
5-10. Bluetooth®
5
Multimedia
■Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the display.
If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console
box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may
deteriorate.
If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or
covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.
■Battery charge/signal status
●This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player or
cellular phone itself.
●This system does not have a charging function.
●The portable audio player or cellular phone battery will be depleted quickly
when the device is connected to Bluetooth®.
■When using the Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same
time
The following problems may occur.
●The Bluetooth® audio connection may be interrupted.
●Noise may be heard during Bluetooth® audio playback.
■About the contact in this system
The following data is stored for every registered cellular phone. When
another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
●Contact data
●Call history
●Favorite
●Message
When removing a Bluetooth® phone from the system, the above-mentioned
data is also deleted.
360 5-10. Bluetooth®
■Compatible models
The Bluetooth® audio system supports portable audio players with the follow-
ing specifications
●Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 2.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)
●Profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the multi-
media system.
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)
This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment.
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the
type of portable audio player connected.
The hands-free system supports cellular phones with the following specifica-
tions.
●Bluetooth® specification:
Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)
●Profiles:
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.6 or
higher)
This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone or
head set. It has outgoing and incoming call functions.
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2)
This is a profile to transfer contact data. When a Bluetooth® compatible
cellular phone has both PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended:
Ver. 1.1)
• MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher
This is a profile to transfer contact data.
If the cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot register it with the
hands-free system. OPP, PBAP or MAP services must be selected individu-
ally.
361
5-10. Bluetooth®
5
Multimedia
■Reconnecting the portable audio player
If the portable audio player is disconnected due to poor reception when the
engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key
system), or ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key
system), the system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.
If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instruc-
tions below to reconnect:
●Select the portable audio player again
●Enter the portable audio player
■When you sell your car
Be sure to delete your personal data. (P. 290)
WARNING
■While driving
Do not use the portable audio player, cellular phone or connect a device to
the Bluetooth® system.
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable dis-
tance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves
may affect the operation of such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device
other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should con-
sult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation
under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.
362 5-10. Bluetooth®
NOTICE
■When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your portable audio player or cellular phone in the vehicle. The
inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable
audio player or cellular phone.
363
5-11. Using the voice command system
5
Multimedia
Voice command system
Press the talk switch.
Select to train voice recogni-
tion.
Select to start the voice recog-
nition tutorial.
Select “OK” and say the desired command.
On the list screen, you can select the desired command.
To cancel the voice command system, press and hold the talk switch.
The voice command system enables the hands-free system to
be operated using voice commands.
Operations of the voice command system can be performed by
selecting the menu corresponding to each function on the
screen. Even if any menu is selected, commands displayed on
all menus can be operated.
Using the voice command system
1
1
2
2
364 5-11. Using the voice command system
■Microphone
P. 330
■When using the microphone
●It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a com-
mand.
●Voice commands may not be recognized if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.
●In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command
properly and using voice commands may not be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system
enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However,
the system cannot recognize every variation of each command.
In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the proce-
dure and directly state the desired operation.
Not all voice commands are displayed in the short cut menu.
This function is available in English, Spanish and French.
■Expression examples for each function
Casual speech recognization
Command Expression examples
“Call <name>
<type>”
Get me <Robert Brown>.
Call <Robert Brown> on <Work> phone
“Dial <number>” Dial <3334445555>
Get me <3334445555>
365
5-11. Using the voice command system
5
Multimedia
Some recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown
below as examples.
Basic
Phone
Command list
Command Action
“Help” Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of com-
mands or operation methods
“Go Back” Returns to the previous screen
Command Action
“Redial” Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgo-
ing call
“Call Back” Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming
call
“Show Recent
Calls” Displays the call history screen
“Dial <phone num-
ber>” Places a call to the said phone number
“Call <contacts>
<phonetypes>”
Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from
the phone book
366 5-11. Using the voice command system
The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free
mode via the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assis-
tant, a compatible cellular phone must be registered and connected to
this system via Bluetooth®. (P. 322)
Press and hold the on the
steering wheel until you hear
the beeps.
The Mobile Assistant can be
used only when the following
screen is displayed.
To cancel the Mobile Assistant,
select “Cancel”, press the or
press and hold the on the steer-
ing wheel.
To restart the Mobile Assistant for
additional commands, press the
on the steering wheel.
• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system responds to a
voice command.
• After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will
automatically end to complete the requested action.
■Adjusting the Mobile Assistant volume
The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the
PWR·VOL knob or steering wheel volume switches. The Mobile
Assistant and phone call volumes are synchronized.
Mobile Assistant
1
2
367
5-11. Using the voice command system
5
Multimedia
■Notes about Mobile Assistant
●The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version
installed on the connected device.
●Some Siri® features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an
unavailable function, Siri® will inform you that the function is not available.
●If Siri® is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth®, an
error message will be displayed on the screen.
●While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used.
●If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio
source is Bluetooth® audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction
prompts.
368 5-11. Using the voice command system
369
6
Interior features
6-1. Using the air conditioning
system
Manual air conditioning
system............................. 370
Automatic air conditioning
system............................. 376
Seat heaters...................... 383
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................ 385
• Interior light ................... 386
• Front personal lights ..... 386
• Cargo lamp main
switch............................ 387
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features ..... 388
• Glove box...................... 389
• Front console box ......... 390
• Overhead console......... 390
• Cup holders .................. 391
• Bottle holders................ 392
• Storage boxes............... 393
Luggage compartment
features........................... 396
6-4. Other interior features
Other interior features ....... 406
• Sun visors..................... 406
• Vanity mirrors................ 406
• Clock............................. 407
• Power outlets
(12 V DC)...................... 408
• Power outlet
(120 V AC).................... 409
• Wireless charger........... 414
• Assist grips ................... 419
• Camera mounting
bracket.......................... 420
Garage door opener.......... 421
Compass........................... 428
370 6-1. Using the air conditioning system
Manual air conditioning system
■Adjusting the temperature setting
To adjust the temperature set-
ting, turn the temperature con-
trol dial clockwise (warm) or
counterclockwise (cool).
If is not pressed, the sys-
tem will blow ambient tempera-
ture air or heated air.
For quick cooling, turn the tem-
perature control dial to the “MAX
A/C” position.
The air conditioning will automatically turn on and the air intake selector
will be set to recirculated air mode.
: If equipped
Air conditioning controls
371
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
■Fan speed setting
To adjust the fan speed, turn
the fan speed control dial clock-
wise (increase) or counterclock-
wise (decrease).
Turning the dial to “OFF” turns
off the fan.
■Change the airflow mode
To select the airflow, set the air
outlet selector dial to the
desired position.
The positions between the air
outlet selections can also be
selected for more delicate
adjustment.
■Other functions
●Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
(P. 372)
●Defogging the windshield (P. 372)
●Defogging the outside rear view mirrors (P. 372)
372 6-1. Using the air conditioning system
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from
outside the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recy-
cles air inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is
pressed.
■Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side win-
dows.
Set the air outlet selector dial to position.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recir-
culated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and
temperature up.
■Defogging the outside rear view mirrors
Defogger is used to defog to remove raindrops, dew and frost from
the outside rear view mirrors.
Press .
The defogger will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
Other functions
373
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
[
■Location of air outlets
Air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected airflow mode.
*: Double Cab models only
■Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Open the vent
Close the vent
Air outlets
1
2
374 6-1. Using the air conditioning system
■Fogging up of the windows
●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the wind-
shield effectively.
●If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-
side/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective
in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling
operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior
effectively.
■When the outside temperature exceeds 75F (24C) and air conditioning
system is on
●In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air condition-
ing system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also
reduce fuel consumption.
●Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch
is in the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION
ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
●It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing .
■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed.
■Ventilation and air conditioning odors
●To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to
be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
■Air conditioning filter
P. 478
375
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
WARNING
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
●Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind-
shield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
■To prevent burns
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror
defoggers are on.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
●Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers to
defog.
376 6-1. Using the air conditioning system
Automatic air conditioning system
■Adjusting the temperature setting
To adjust the temperature set-
ting, turn the temperature con-
trol dial clockwise (warm) or
counterclockwise (cool).
The air conditioning system
switches between individual and
simultaneous mode each time
is pressed. (P. 378)
: If equipped
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according
to the temperature setting.
Air conditioning controls
377
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
■Fan speed setting
To adjust the fan speed, turn
the fan speed control dial clock-
wise (increase) or counterclock-
wise (decrease).
Press to turn the fan off.
■Change the airflow mode
To change the airflow, press
.
The air outlets used are
switched each time the button is
pressed.
Air flows to the upper body
Air flows to the upper body
and feet
Air flows to the feet
Air flows to the feet and
the windshield defogger
operates
■Other functions
●Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
(P. 379)
●Defogging the windshield (P. 379)
●Defogging the outside rear view mirrors (P. 379)
1
2
3
4
378 6-1. Using the air conditioning system
Press .
Adjust the temperature setting.
To stop the operation, press .
■Automatic mode indicator
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the auto-
matic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for func-
tions other than that operated is maintained.
■Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats sep-
arately (“SYNC” mode)
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simul-
taneous mode each time is pressed.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is on):
The driver’s side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the
temperature for driver’s and front passenger’s side. At this time,
operate the front passenger’s side temperature control dial to enter
individual mode.
Individual mode (the indicator on is off):
The temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s side can be
adjusted separately.
Using by automatic mode
1
2
3
379
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from
outside the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recy-
cles air inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is
pressed.
■Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side win-
dows.
Press .
Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recir-
culated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.) To defog the wind-
shield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is
defogged.
■Defogging the outside rear view mirrors
Defogger is used to defog to remove raindrops, dew and frost from
the outside rear view mirrors.
Press .
The defogger will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
Other functions
380 6-1. Using the air conditioning system
[
■Location of air outlets
Air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected airflow mode.
*: Double Cab models only
■Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air out-
lets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Open the vent
Close the vent
Air outlets
1
2
381
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
■Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and
the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after is pressed.
■Fogging up of the windows
●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the
windshield effectively.
●If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■Outside/recirculated air mode
●When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-
side/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effec-
tive in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During
cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle
interior effectively.
●Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the
temperature setting or the inside temperature.
■When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air condition-
ing system is on
●In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air condition-
ing system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also
reduce fuel consumption.
●Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch
is in the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION
ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
●It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing .
■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is selected.
382 6-1. Using the air conditioning system
■Ventilation and air conditioning odors
●To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to
be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
■Air conditioning filter
P. 478
WARNING
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
●Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, block-
ing your vision.
■To prevent burns
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror
defoggers are on.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
●Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers to
defog.
383
6-1. Using the air conditioning system
6
Interior features
Seat heaters
: If equipped
WARNING
■Burns
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
●Do not use seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor
burns or overheating.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the seat heaters
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.
384 6-1. Using the air conditioning system
Turns the seat heaters on
Drivers side
Front passenger side
Each time the switch is pressed,
the operation condition changes as
follows.
Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 seg-
ments lit) Lo (1 segment lit)
Off
The level indicator (amber) light up
during operation.
■The seat heaters can be used when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■When not in use
Turn the seat heaters off by pressing the button. The indicator light turns off.
1
2
385
6-2. Using the interior lights
6
Interior features
Interior lights list
Front interior light/personal
lights
Rear interior light (P. 386)
Engine switch light (vehicles
with a wireless remote control
system)
Engine switch light (vehicles
with a smart key system)
Center tray light
Cargo lamp (if equipped)
(P. 387)
1
2
3
4
5
6
386 6-2. Using the interior lights
■Front
Off
Door position
The personal/interior lights
come on when a door is
opened. They turn off when the
doors are closed.
On
■Rear
Door position
The personal/interior lights
come on when a door is
opened. They turn off when the
doors are closed.
On
On/off
Interior light
1
2
3
1
2
Front personal lights
387
6-2. Using the interior lights
6
Interior features
Off
Door position
The cargo lamp comes on when a
door is opened. They turn off when
the doors are closed.
On
■Illuminated entry system
Vehicles without a smart key system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,
whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/
closed.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to engine switch mode, the
presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and
whether the doors are opened/closed.
■To prevent battery discharge
If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the main
switch is in the door position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 min-
utes:
●Front personal lights
●Interior lights
●Cargo lamp (if equipped)
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 592)
Cargo lamp main switch (if equipped)
1
2
3
388 6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Bottle holders (P. 392)
Front console box (P. 390)
Overhead console
(if equipped) (P. 390)
Glove box (P. 389)
Cup holders (P. 391)
Storage boxes (P. 393)
1
2
3
4
5
6
389
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
Open (pull the lever up)
Lock
Unlock
WARNING
■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may result in the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
■When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use
Keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur
due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.
Glove box
1
2
3
390 6-3. Using the storage features
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock.
■Passing a cable from the console box
The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and
similar small items.
Press the lid.
Front console box
Overhead console (if equipped)
WARNING
■Items unsuitable for storing
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the overhead console to open and the items inside
may fall out, resulting in an accident.
391
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Cup holders
WARNING
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent
burns.
392 6-3. Using the storage features
Front door
Front console box
Rear door (Double Cab models only)
■When using the holder as a bottle holder
●When storing a bottle, close the cap.
●The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
Bottle holders
393
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
Rear (Access Cab models [vehicles without rear seats])
Turn the knob counterclockwise
and open the lid.
Under the rear seats (Access Cab models [vehicles with rear
seats])
Pull up the lever and raise the
bottom cushion up.
WARNING
■Items unsuitable for the bottle holders
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
NOTICE
■Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-
tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.
Storage boxes
1
394 6-3. Using the storage features
Turn the knob counterclock-
wise.
Open the lid.
Press the lid against the bottom of
the lower cushion until it is sup-
ported by the hook-and-loop fas-
tener.
Make sure that the lid is supported
to prevent it from closing unexpect-
edly.
Under the rear seats (Double Cab models)
Swing the bottom cushion up by
pulling the lock release strap.
Turn the knob counterclockwise
and open the lid.
2
3
1
2
395
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
WARNING
■Caution while driving
Keep the storage boxes closed and locked.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■Storage box (Access cab models [vehicles without rear seat])
Never let anyone sit on the storage box. Doing so may damage the storage
box and cause injury. In addition, it may cause death or severe injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
396 6-3. Using the storage features
Luggage compartment features
■Deck
■Tonneau cover (if equipped)
P. 4 00
■Behind the rear seat (Double Cab models only)
Grocery bag hooks (P. 404)
Storage boxes (P. 405)
Left side Right side
Deck hooks (P. 399)
Auxiliary boxes (P. 397)
Tie-down cleats (P. 397)
Power outlet
(if equipped) (P. 409)
1
2
3
4
1
2
397
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
■Auxiliary boxes
Turn the knob and open the lid.
■Tie-down cleats
The deck rail system enables you to insert and move tie-down
cleats to their best location along deck rails to secure a load.
Locking plate
Thumb wheel
Tie-down cleat
Deck
1
2
3
398 6-3. Using the storage features
●Installing the tie-down cleat
Loosen the thumb wheel in a
counterclockwise motion,
and depress the wheel so
that the locking plate main-
tains 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) gap.
Deck rail
Detent
Locking plate
Insert the locking plate into
the deck rail, rotate the tie-
down cleat 90°, and release
the thumb wheel.
Slide the cleat to the closest
detent in the rail system. You
will feel that the locking plate
snaps into a detent.
When using a tonneau cover,
confirm the cleat position will not
interfere with its proper closing
and latching.
Tighten the thumb wheel in a
clockwise motion until the
clutch mechanism ratchets.
1
1
2
3
2
3
4
399
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
Check the tie-down cleat to
confirm that it is locked into a
detent and securely mounted
to the deck rail system.
■Deck hooks
Deck hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
5
400 6-3. Using the storage features
■Open the tonneau cover
Open the tailgate. (P. 116)
Pull the lever and lift to open
the rear tonneau cover.
Pull the lever and lift to open
the center tonneau cover.
Secure by using the storage
straps.
Make sure that the buckle is
fully engaged by pulling on the
strap.
Tonneau cover (if equipped)
1
2
3
4
401
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
■Close the tonneau cover
Remove the straps while
pushing the release lock.
Confirm that there is no tie-down
cleat in the latch position before
closing the tonneau cover.
Close the tonneau cover and
push down on the top sur-
face (latch position) until it
clicks.
After closing the tonneau cover,
try pulling it up towards you to
make sure all latches are
securely locked. Confirm cargo
and cleats do not interfere with
tonneau cover latching and
completely closing.
■Remove and install the tonneau cover
Open the cap and remove
the bolt.
Open the rear and center tonneau cover.
Secure by using the storage straps.
Pull the lever and lift to
remove the tonneau cover.
1
2
STY63BD024
1
2
3
4
402 6-3. Using the storage features
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Push down on the top surface (latch position) until it clicks, tighten the
bolt, and then close the cap.
After closing the tonneau cover, try pulling it up towards you to make
sure all latches are securely locked.
WARNING
■Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary boxes closed and locked.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■When the deck hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the deck hooks to their stowed positions.
■Tie-down cleat precautions
●Properly install and tighten the tie-down cleats into the deck rail system.
Failure to properly install and tighten the tie-down cleats can cause cargo
to become unsecured. Unsecured cargo can cause injury when the vehi-
cle is in motion.
●Properly secure all cargo to prevent shifting or sliding during driving.
Failure to properly secure cargo can cause injury when the vehicle is in
motion.
●Applying loads at an angle to the tie-down cleat greater than 45° or loads
greater than 220 lb. (100 kg) may cause damage to the deck, deck rail
system, tie-down cleat and/or the cargo.
●Do not exceed a total tensile load of 440 lb. (200 kg) per deck rail.
●Do not install more than the following number of tie-down cleats per deck
rail:
• Side rail:
Short deck—Max. 3 locations
Long deck—Max. 4 locations
●Confirm cargo and cleats do not interfere with tonneau cover latching and
completely closing.
5
403
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
WARNING
■Caution for the tonneau cover
Observe the following precautions regarding the tonneau cover.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Confirm the tonneau cover is securely closed before driving.
●Confirm cargo and cleats do not interfere with tonneau cover latching and
completely closing.
●Bolt must be installed and properly tightened.
Tightening torque:
20 ft·lbf (27.3 N·m, 2.8 kgf·m)
●When the tonneau cover is fully opened, make sure that the buckle is
secure by pulling on the storage strap.
●Be careful not to get your hands pinched between the tonneau cover and
the deck when opening and closing the tonneau cover, or between the
panels when folding.
●Make sure that all latches are securely locked by pulling it upwards.
●Do not stand or sit on the tonneau cover.
●Do not install the tonneau cover backwards, or in any other orientation
than indicated (“TACOMA” text should be towards the tailgate, and the
safety bolt must be installed and tightened.
●Do not drive with only the front or only
the rear tonneau cover opened.
404 6-3. Using the storage features
■Grocery bag hooks
Grocery bag hook is designed
to hang things like grocery bag.
NOTICE
■When using the tonneau cover
●Deck area is not waterproof, so take care when transporting items which
may be damaged by water.
●Do not drive the vehicle with objects on top of the tonneau cover.
●Take care when operating and storing the tonneau cover to avoid scratch-
ing its outer surfaces. When stowing, stand it up with the section with stor-
age straps facing upward.
●Take care when removing and installing the tonneau cover, as it is heavy.
●To avoid damage, secure the storage straps to the snaps provided. Failure
to do so could result in broken buckle, or damage deck rail.
Behind the rear seat (Double Cab models only)
405
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
■Storage boxes
Storage box is designed to place things like bottles.
Left side Right side (vehicles without a
sub woofer)
NOTICE
■Grocery bag hook weight capacity
Do not hang any object heavier than 7 lb. (3 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.
406 6-4. Other interior features
Other interior features
To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side posi-
tion, flip down, unhook, and
swing it to the side.
To use the side extender, place
the visor in the side position,
then slide it backward.
Open the cover
The light turns on when the cover
is opened.
Sun visors
1
2
3
Vanity mirrors (if equipped)
NOTICE
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is
stopped.
407
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
The clock is displayed on the
screen.
■Setting the clock
Vehicles with Entune Audio (Audio system types: P. 280)
P. 2 90
Vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio
(Audio system types: P. 280)
Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■The clock is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The clock data will be reset.
Clock
408 6-4. Other interior features
Please use as a power supply for electronic goods that use less than
12 VDC/10 A (power consumption of 120 W).
When using electronic goods, make sure that the power consumption
of all the connected power outlets are less than 120 W.
Type A (instrument panel)
Open the lid.
Type B (inside of the console box)
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock and
open the lid.
Power outlets (12 V DC)
409
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
■The power outlets can be used when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
The power outlet can be used for electrical appliances.
●Main switch
To use the power outlet, turn on
the main switch.
The power supply starts a few
seconds after the main switch is
pressed.
●Power outlet socket (deck)
Open the lid.
NOTICE
●Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short
circuit.
●Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
Power outlet (120 V AC) (if equipped)
410 6-4. Other interior features
■Maximum available capacity of the power outlet
●While the vehicle is being driven
The maximum capacity of the power outlet is always 120 V AC/
100 W.
●When the vehicle is stationary
The maximum capacity of the power outlet varies depending on
the following conditions:
• The maximum capacity is 120 V AC/100 W when the following
conditions applies:
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
The shift lever is moved to any positions other than P and N.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
The clutch pedal is depressed.
• The maximum capacity is 120 V AC/400 W when the following
conditions applies:
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
The shift lever is in P or N.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
The shift lever is in N and the clutch pedal is not depressed.
The maximum capacity of 400 W can only be restored by turning the
power outlet main switch off and then on again under condition
described above.
■The power outlet can be used when
The engine is running.
■The indicator light changes according to the maximum available capac-
ity as follows:
■When the power outlet is in operation
The sound of the cooling fan may be heard from the front console box. This is
normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
120 V AC/400 W
120 V AC/100 W
1
2
411
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
■If the engine is started with the power outlet main switch on
The maximum capacity of the power supply may decrease to below the stan-
dard, or may be cut off completely, even when the vehicle is stationary.
■The protection circuit may be activated to cut the power supply if any of
the following conditions apply:
●The engine is started with the power outlet main switch on.
●Use of electrical appliances exceeding the maximum capacity is attempted.
A sound may be heard when the protection circuit is activated. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a malfunction.
●Electrical appliances, which consume power exceeding 100 W, have been
used continuously for a long time period.
●The total power usage by all electrical features (headlights, air conditioning,
etc.) has exceeded the total vehicle maximum for an extended period of
time.
■If the protection circuit is activated and the power supply is cut, conduct
the following procedure:
Park the vehicle in a safe place, and then securely apply the parking
brake.
Check and ensure the following conditions:
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
The shift lever is in P or N.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
The shift lever is in N and the clutch pedal is not depressed.
Make sure that the power consumption of the electric appliance is within
the maximum capacity of the power outlet and the appliance is not bro-
ken.
Press the power outlet main switch again.
When the cabin temperature is high, open the windows to cool the tempera-
ture down. Once it reaches the normal temperature, turn the power outlet
main switch on again.
If the power supply does not resume even after the above procedure has
been performed, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
1
2
3
4
412 6-4. Other interior features
WARNING
■Using a power outlet
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury.
●Use of the power outlet when it is wet with water or snow may result in
electrical shocks and is extremely dangerous. The power outlet must be
thoroughly dried before use.
●Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet.
●Be careful not to get any part of your body caught in the power outlet lid.
●When using electrical appliances, strictly follow any cautions and notices
written on their labels and in the manufacturers’ instruction manuals.
●Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet or its inverter in any
way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunctions or accidents, which
could cause serious damage or injuries. Contact your Toyota dealer for
any necessary repairs.
■To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electric appliances before
use and do not use any appliances that may do any of the following:
●Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving.
●Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or over-
heating while driving.
●Emit steam while the windows of the cabin are closed.
■To prevent unexpected accidents, such as electric shocks, do not per-
form any of the following actions:
●Using the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping.
●Contaminating the power outlet with liquid substances or mud.
●Handling electrical appliance plugs at the power outlet with wet hands or
feet.
●Inserting foreign objects into the power outlet.
●Using malfunctioning electric appliances.
●Inserting inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet.
413
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlet and the plug
●Close the power outlet lid when not in use.
●Do not allow foreign objects or liquids to enter the power outlet, as this
may cause a short circuit.
●Do not use plug adaptors to connect too many plugs to the power outlet.
●After removing a plug, gently close the power outlet lid.
■To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use a 120 V AC appliance that requires more than the maximum
capacity of the power outlet. If a 120 V AC appliance that consumes more
than the maximum capacity is used, the protection circuit will cut the power
supply.
■Appliances that may not operate properly (120 V AC)
The following 120 V AC appliances may not operate even if their power con-
sumption is under maximum capacity.
●Appliances with high initial peak wattage
●Measuring devices that process precise data.
●Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
■To prevent battery discharge
Turn off all the vehicle’s electronic equipment and accessories, such as the
headlights and air conditioning, when electrical appliances that consume in
excess of 100 W are used continuously for long periods of time.
■To prevent any damage caused by heat
●Do not use any electrical appliances that give off intense heat, such as
toasters, in any locations including the internal or external trim, seats and
deck.
●Do not use any electrical appliances that are easily affected by vibration or
heat inside the vehicle. Vibration while driving, or the heat of the sun while
parking, may result in damage to those electrical appliances.
■If any electrical appliances are to be used while driving
Securely fasten both the appliances and their cables to prevent them from
falling or getting caught in any of the power train components.
■If the power outlet is loose when an electrical appliance plug is con-
nected
Replace the outlet. Contact your Toyota dealer for any necessary replace-
ments.
■If the power outlet gets dirty
Turn the main switch off and use a soft, clean cloth to wipe it gently. Do not
use any cleansing materials, such as organic solvents, wax, or compound
cleaners, as these may damage the power outlet or cause it to malfunction.
414 6-4. Other interior features
A mobile device can be charged wirelessly on the tray.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Charging can only be performed with the engine switch in the
“ACC” or “ON” position and only on mobile devices with the “ ”
logo.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Charging can only be performed with the engine switch in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode and only on mobile devices with the
“ ” logo.
Press the wireless charger switch.
Place a mobile device on the
tray as shown in the illustration.
An amber indicator is illuminated
while charging is in progress.
When charging is complete, a
green indicator will also be illumi-
nated. Some phones, cases or
cover type wireless chargers may
not cause the green indicator to
illuminate even though it is fully
charged.
When placing the mobile device on the wireless charging surface of
the tray, make sure that there are no objects in-between the mobile
device and the tray. They may interfere with charging.
Wireless charger (if equipped)
1
Type A Type B
2
415
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
■If the wireless charger LED indicators flash
If the wireless charging surface of the tray becomes too hot, the LED indica-
tors will flash and charging is canceled. The LED indicators will be illuminated
if the surface of the tray cools down.
If the LED indicators flash even though the surface of the tray is not hot, the
wireless charger may be malfunctioning. Consult your Toyota dealer.
■When charging of the wireless charger stops temporarily
If any of the following operations are performed with the wireless key or elec-
tronic key present, charging may stop temporarily. Charging will start again
after a while.
• Locking/unlocking the doors by touching the door handle
(vehicles with a smart key system)
• Opening/closing the doors
• Starting the engine
• Locking the doors by pressing the lock button on the wireless key or elec-
tronic key
• When the electronic key is out of the detection area
(vehicles with a smart key system)
■Certification for the wireless charger
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules.
Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
19001 S. Western Avenue
Torrance, CA 90501
For vehicles sold in Canada
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
416 6-4. Other interior features
417
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
WARNING
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should main-
tain a reasonable distance between themselves and the wireless charger.
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
●Before using the wireless charger, users of any electrical medical device
other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should con-
sult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation
under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.
●To avoid interference with other electrical devices, turn the wireless
charger off by turning off the wireless charger switch.
■To prevent damage or fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the possibility of equipment failure or damage,
vehicle fire, burns due to heat, or even electrical shock.
●Do not put any metallic objects between the charging area and the porta-
ble device.
●Do not place anything but a device to be charged on the wireless charger.
It is not designed for use as an auxiliary box.
●Do not apply force or impact to the wireless charger.
●Do not disassemble or modify the wireless charger.
●Do not attempt to charge portable devices which are not compatible with
the Qi wireless charging standard.
●Do not bring magnetized objects close to the wireless charger.
●Do not perform charging if the charging area is dusty.
●Keep foreign objects away from the wireless charger, and do not spill liquid
on the wireless charger.
●Do not cover the wireless charger with a cloth or other object while charg-
ing.
●Do not attach metallic objects, such as aluminum stickers, to the charging
area.
418 6-4. Other interior features
NOTICE
■Conditions in which the wireless charger may not operate correctly
In the following situations, the wireless charger may not operate correctly:
●When a portable device is fully charged
●When there is a foreign object between the charging area and portable
device
●When a portable device becomes hot while charging
●When a portable device is placed on the wireless area with its charging
surface facing up
●When a portable device is not centered on the charging area
●When the vehicle is near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station,
radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong
radio waves or electrical noise
●When the portable device is in contact with, or is covered by any of the fol-
lowing metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Metal hand warmers
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When wireless keys (that emit radio waves) other than those of your vehi-
cle are being used nearby.
If in situations other than above the wireless charger does not operate prop-
erly or the operation indicator light is blinking, the wireless charger may be
malfunctioning. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■To prevent failure or damage to data
●Do not bring magnetic cards, such as a credit card, or magnetic recording
media, close to the wireless charger. Otherwise, data may be erased due
to the influence of magnetism.
Additionally, do not bring precision instruments such as wrist watches,
close to the wireless charger, as such objects may malfunction.
●Do not leave portable devices in the cabin. The temperature inside the
cabin may become high when parked in the sun, and cause damage to the
device.
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the wireless charger for a long period of time with the engine is
stopped.
419
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
An assist grip (type A) installed on the pillar can be used when getting
in or out of the vehicle and others.
An assist grip (type B) installed on the ceiling can be used to support
your body while sitting on the seat.
Assist grip (type A)
Assist grip (type B)
Assist grips
1
2
WARNING
■Assist grip (type B)
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from
your seat.
Doing so could damage the assist grip, or could cause you to injure yourself
by falling over.
NOTICE
Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.
420 6-4. Other interior features
Windshield is equipped with a
dedicated mounting bracket for
use with the GoPro® QRB (Quick
Release Buckle) and must be
connected directly to the GoPro®
camera housing.
■Before using
Comply with state and local regulations while operating the GoPro® camera.
Camera mounting bracket
WARNING
■Caution while driving
Do not operate any cameras or recording devices that may be installed to
the camera mounting bracket on the windshield while driving. Doing so may
result in a loss of vehicle control.
421
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
Garage door opener
The HomeLink® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming methods on the following pages to determine the
method which is appropriate for the device.
HomeLink® indicator light
Garage door operation indica-
tors
Buttons
■Before programming the HomeLink®
●During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or
other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that peo-
ple and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to
prevent injury or other potential harm.
●It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote
control transmitter for more accurate programming.
●Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be
equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may
need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the
“learn” or “smart” button on the garage door opener motor.
: If equipped
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems,
security systems, and other devices.
HomeLink®
1
2
3
422 6-4. Other interior features
■Programming the HomeLink®
Press and release the HomeLink® button you want to program
and check that the HomeLink® indicator light flashes orange.
Perform within 60 seconds of , or the indicator light will stop flash-
ing and programming will not be able to be completed.
Point the remote control
transmitter for the device at
the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator
light in view while programming.
Perform one of the 2 steps below, depending on device type
being programmed:
For U.S.A. owners
Press and hold the handheld
transmitter button until the
HomeLink® indicator light
changes from slowly flashing
orange to rapidly flashing
green (rolling code) or contin-
uously lit green (fixed code),
then release the button.
For U.S.A. owned entry gates and devices in the Canadian
market
Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 sec-
ond intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink® indicator light
changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green
(rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code).
Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button and observing the indicator light:
●Device with fixed code: If the indicator light is solid/continuous,
programming has been completed and your garage door or
other device should operate when the HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.
1
3 1
2
3
4
423
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
●Device with rolling code: If the indicator light flashes rapidly,
your garage door opener motor (or other device) is equipped
with a rolling code. Complete the programming process by
firmly pressing and holding the programmed HomeLink® but-
ton for 2 seconds and then release the button.
●If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed
to “Programming a rolling code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the
remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■Programming a rolling code system
Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the unit. The
name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
Refer to the Owner’s manual
supplied with the garage door
opener motor for details.
Press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button.
Perform within 30 sec-
onds after performing .
5
1
2
3
2
424 6-4. Other interior features
Press and hold the desired
HomeLink® button (inside the
vehicle) for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat this
sequence (press/hold/
release) up to 3 times to
complete programming.
If the garage door opener motor
operates when the HomeLink®
button is pressed, the garage
door opener motor recognizes
the HomeLink® signal.
■Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only avail-
able for compatible devices)
When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the sta-
tus of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators
in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener
motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility,
refer to www.HomeLink.com.)
Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has
been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to
HomeLink®, both garage door operation indicators will flash rap-
idly green and the light on the garage door opener motor will
blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, perform and within the first 10
presses of the HomeLink® button after programming has been
completed.
Press a programmed HomeLink® button to operate a garage
door.
Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the
garage door operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the
establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door
opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will
flash rapidly green and the light on the garage door opener motor
will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
3
1
2 3
2
3
425
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
■Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button
When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already
have devices registered to them can be overwritten:
With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing orange, release
the HomeLink® button and perform “Programming HomeLink®”
(it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink® indicator to start
flashing).
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator
light should turn on.
The status of the opening and
closing of a garage door is shown
by the indicators.
Opening
Closing
This function is only available if the
garage door opener motor used is
a compatible device. (To check
device compatibility, refer to
www.HomeLink.com.)
The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of
the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the
garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback
signals from the garage door may not be received.
To recall the previous door operation status, press and release
either HomeLink® buttons and or and
simultaneously. The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 sec-
onds.
Operating the HomeLink®
Garage door operation indicators
1
2
1
1
2
Color Status
Orange (flashing) Currently opening/closing
Green Opening/closing has completed
Red (flashing) Feedback signals cannot be received
426 6-4. Other interior features
Press and hold the 2 outside but-
tons for 10 seconds until the
HomeLink® indicator light
changes from continuously lit
orange to rapidly flashing green.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.
■Codes stored in the HomeLink® memory
●The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is discon-
nected.
●If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button
that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not
be erased.
■Before programming
●Install a new battery in the transmitter.
●The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLink®.
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three codes)
427
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
■Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NZLAECHL5
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
REMARQUE:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
■When support is necessary
For compatible products and video programming instructions, please visit
www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex, or call the
toll-free HomeLink Hotline at 1-800-355-3515 (North America).
■About HomeLink®
HomeLink and the HomeLink house icon are registered trademarks of Gen-
tex Corporation.
WARNING
■When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and
objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door
opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A
door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious
injury.
■When operating or programming HomeLink®
Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.
428 6-4. Other interior features
Compass
To turn the compass on or off, press the button for more than 3 sec-
onds.
: If equipped
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direc-
tion in which the vehicle is heading.
Operation
Type A Type B
Displays and directions
Display Direction
NNorth
NE Northeast
EEast
SE Southeast
SSouth
SW Southwest
WWest
NW Northwest
429
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to
the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will
deviate.
To obtain higher precision of accurate calibration, refer to the following.
■Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press the hold the button for 6 seconds. A number (1 to 15)
appears on the compass display.
Press the switch, and referring to the map above, select the num-
ber of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the cali-
bration is complete.
Calibrating the compass
Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8
1
2
Type A Type B
3
430 6-4. Other interior features
■Circling calibration
Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press and hold the button for 9 seconds.
“C” appears on the compass display.
Drive the vehicle at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less in a circle
until a direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until a direction is dis-
played.
■Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
●The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
●The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
●The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to inter-
ference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under
a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersec-
tion, near a large vehicle, etc.).
●The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
●The battery has been disconnected.
●A door is open.
1
2
Type A Type B
3
431
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
WARNING
■While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■When doing the circling calibration
Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity.
Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■To avoid the compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■To ensure normal operation of the compass
●Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
●During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power win-
dows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
432 6-4. Other interior features
433
7
Maintenance and care
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.......... 434
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior........... 437
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements................... 440
General maintenance........ 442
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs......................... 445
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ..................... 446
Hood ................................. 448
Engine compartment......... 450
Tires .................................. 462
Tire inflation pressure ....... 472
Wheels .............................. 475
Air conditioning filter.......... 478
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery...... 481
Checking and replacing
fuses ............................... 484
Light bulbs......................... 487
434 7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly
with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of
the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
●In certain automatic car washes, the roof antenna may interfere with
machine operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned prop-
erly or result in damage to the antenna.
■High pressure car washes
●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of
the windows.
●Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is
closed properly.
■Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical clean-
ers.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
●Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in
prime condition:
435
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
WARNING
■When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components, etc., to catch fire.
■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has
cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
NOTICE
■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels, etc.)
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
●Clean the drainage hole of the deck
regularly.
If the drainage hole is stopped up, the
water will not be able to flow, and it will
cause rust.
436 7-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■When using a high pressure car wash
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured
cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they
come into contact with high-pressure water.
• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts
437
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
all remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and
wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior
and keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Cleaning the leather areas
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
438 7-1. Maintenance and care
■Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to
maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge
or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water.
Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keep-
ing the carpet as dry as possible.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
WARNING
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components, etc., to malfunction or catch
fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 36)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use a polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect
off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
439
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
●Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi-
cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
●Do not use a polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
●Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
440 7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can
be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty
coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Warranty
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if
a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-
ranty coverage.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and reg-
ular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to
perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following main-
tenance:
General maintenance
Scheduled maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance
441
7-2. Maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■Resetting the reminder light (vehicles without a multi-information dis-
play) or the message (vehicles with a multi-information display) indicat-
ing maintenance is required (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the reminder light or the message.
To reset the reminder light or the message, follow the procedure described
below:
Turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles without a smart key system:
While pressing the “ODO/TRIP” button (P. 88), turn the engine switch to
the “ON” position. (do not start the engine because reset mode will be can-
celed)
Vehicles with a smart key system:
While pressing the “ODO/TRIP” button (P. 88), turn the engine switch to
the IGNITION ON mode. (do not start the engine because reset mode will
be canceled)
Continue to press and hold the button until the odometer displays “000000”.
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
●Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with
the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations
of all systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take
care of it.
WARNING
■If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible death or serious injury.
■Handling of the battery
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (P. 459)
1
2
3
442 7-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem
you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota
dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery Check the connections. (P. 459)
Brake fluid Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (P. 456)
Engine coolant Is the engine coolant at the correct level?(P. 454)
Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct level? (P. 452)
Exhaust system There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.
Power steering fluid Is the power steering fluid at correct level?
(P. 457)
Radiator/condenser The radiator and condenser should be free from for-
eign objects. (P. 456)
Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid? (P. 461)
443
7-2. Maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal • The accelerator pedal should move smoothly
(without uneven pedal effort or catching).
Automatic transmission
“Park” mechanism
• When parked on a slope and the shift lever is
in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clear-
ance from the floor? (P. 576)
• Does the brake pedal have the correct
amount of free play? (P. 576)
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one side when
the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too close to
the floor when the brakes are applied.
Clutch pedal
• Does the clutch pedal move smoothly?
• Does the clutch pedal have correct amount of
free play?
Head restraints • Do the head restraints move smoothly and
lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Do the indicators and buzzers function prop-
erly?
Parking brake
• Does the parking brake lever move smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the parking
brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Seat belts • Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.
Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the correct
amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange sounds com-
ing from the steering wheel.
444 7-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors • Do the doors operate smoothly?
Engine hood • Does the engine hood lock system work prop-
erly?
Fluid leaks • There should not be any signs of fluid leakage
after the vehicle has been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or exces-
sively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
Windshield wipers
• The wiper blades should not show any signs
of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or
deformation.
• The wiper blades should clear the windshield
without streaking or skipping.
WARNING
■If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-
forming maintenance checks.
445
7-2. Maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the
emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and
may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the
vehicle.
●When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary
malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehi-
cle is driven 40 or more times.
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system
monitors the operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after sev-
eral driving trips
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
446 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition
(P. 459)
• Warm water • Baking soda • Grease
• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level
(P. 456)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)
Engine coolant
level (P. 454)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high
quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-
life hybrid organic acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with
50% coolant and 50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with
55% coolant and 45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
Engine oil level
(P. 452)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
Fuses
(P. 484) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Light bulbs
(P. 487)
• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as origi-
nal
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver • Wrench
Power steering
fluid level
(
P. 457
)
• Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding power steering fluid)
Radiator and
condenser
(
P. 456)
Tire inflation
pressure
(P. 472)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid
(P. 461)
• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for win-
ter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)
447
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
WARNING
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
■When working on the engine compartment
●Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc., right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.,
from getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air.
448 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.
Hold the hood open by inserting
the supporting rod into the slot.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1
2
3
449
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
WARNING
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
■After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
NOTICE
■When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing
the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.
450 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
2TR-FE engine
Washer fluid tank (P. 461)
Radiator cap
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 454)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 453)
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 457)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 452)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 456)
Fuse box (P. 484)
Battery (P. 459)
Condenser (P. 456)
Radiator (P. 456)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
451
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
2GR-FKS engine
Washer fluid tank (P. 461)
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 457)
Radiator cap
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 452)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 454)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 453)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 456)
Fuse box (P. 484)
Battery (P. 459)
Condenser (P. 456)
Radiator (P. 456)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
452 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out and
check the oil level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick
may differ depending on the
type of vehicle or engine.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Engine oil
1
2
2TR-FE engine 2GR-FKS engine
3
4
5
1
2
3
6
453
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as that already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed
before adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
■Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following
situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be
refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.
●When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
●If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
●When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or
when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
●When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently
through heavy traffic
2TR-FE engine 2GR-FKS engine
Engine oil selection P. 571
Oil quantity
(Low Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Items Clean funnel
1
2
3
454 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to
the “FULL” line. (P. 561)
WARNING
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground.
Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information
concerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
Engine coolant
1
2
3
455
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-
ized water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deion-
ized water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
■If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir cap, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
WARNING
■When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap and engine coolant reservoir cap. (P. 561)
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
456 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
on the tank.
“MAX” line
“MIN” line
■Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Type B only
Turn the engine off.
Depress the brake pedal 20 times or more.
Remove the reservoir cap.
Add newly opened brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.
Radiator and condenser
WARNING
■When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri-
ous injuries, such as burns.
Brake fluid
Type A Type B
1
2
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
1
2
3
4
457
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking effi-
ciency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
■Fluid level
The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
2TR-FE engine
Full (when cold)
Add fluid (when cold)
Full (when hot)
Add fluid (when hot)
Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for
20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid
temperature, 104°F - 175°F [40°C - 80°C])
Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room tem-
perature, 32°F - 104°F [0°C - 40°C])
WARNING
■When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.
Power steering fluid
1
2
3
4
458 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
2GR-FKS engine
Full (when cold)
Add fluid (when cold)
Full (when hot)
Add fluid (when hot)
Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20
minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid
temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C])
Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room tem-
perature, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C])
■Checking the fluid level
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Clean all dirt off the reservoir.
Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinstall the cap and remove it again.
Check the fluid level.
1
2
3
4
Fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III
Items Rag or paper, clean funnel (only for adding fluid)
WARNING
■Checking the fluid level
Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.
NOTICE
■When adding fluid
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
■After replacing the reservoir cap
Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or
damage.
1
2
3
4
5
459
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Check the battery as follows:
■Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
■Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and dis-
connecting the charger cables to the battery.
■After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem)
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Open and close any of the doors.
Restart the engine.
●Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible imme-
diately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
●Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine
may not start when the engine switch turned from off. However, the engine
will operate normally from the second attempt.
●The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is recon-
nected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in
before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine
before disconnect the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery
if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Battery
1
2
1
2
3
460 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
■Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near
battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●Keep children away from the battery.
■Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
NOTICE
■When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
461
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Add washer fluid in the following
situations:
●A washer does not work.
●The low washer fluid warning
light comes on or warning mes-
sage appears on the display
(for Canada only).
Washer fluid
WARNING
■When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine, etc.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
462 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check
the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the
tread.
Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.
New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “” mark, etc.,
molded into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Toyota recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire
pressure warning system after
tire rotation.
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
Checking tires
1
2
3
Tire rotation
463
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire infla-
tion pressure before serious problems arise.
●If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a warning light. (P. 513)
●Vehicles with a multi-informa-
tion display: The tire pressure
detected by the tire pressure
warning system can be dis-
played on the multi-information
display.
◆Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure
warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be
initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID
codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (P. 465)
◆Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
●When rotating the tires.
●When changing the tire size.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
464 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Vehicles without a smart key system:
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch to the
“LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 577)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate
based on this pressure level.
Vehicles without a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Press and hold the tire pres-
sure warning reset switch
until the tire pressure warn-
ing light blinks slowly 3 times.
Vehicles with a multi-information
display: “- -” will be displayed for
inflation pressure of each tire on
the multi-information display
while the tire pressure warning
system determines the position
of each tire.
When position of each tire is
determined, the inflation pres-
sure of each tire will be dis-
played on the multi-information
display.
1
2
3
4
465
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Vehicles without a multi-information display
Vehicles without a smart key system:
Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in the “ON” position
and then turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in IGNITION ON
mode and then turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a multi-information display
Drive the vehicle at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for
approximately 10 minutes.
When initialization is complete, the inflation pressure of each tire
will be displayed on the multi-information display.
Initialization will take longer than approximately 10 minutes if the
vehicle is stopped for a long time, such as at traffic signals.
◆Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your Toyota dealer.
5
5
466 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size
or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels (vehicles with the tire pressure warning
system)
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not reg-
istered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driv-
ing for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for
1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks (vehicles with the tire pressure
warning system)
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
467
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the
replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
■Tire types
●Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When install-
ing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
●All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all
season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance com-
pared with summer tires in highway driving.
●Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (P. 270)
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the tire,
see the load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (P. 582)
Access Cab models
Double Cab models
468 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Initializing the tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the speci-
fied level.
■If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not oper-
ate properly (if equipped)
●In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate
properly.
• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equip-
ment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
• Tire chains, etc., are equipped.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the
wheels or wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified
level.
• If wheel without the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is
used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
●Performance may be affected in the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large
display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or
electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or
other wireless communication device
●When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go
off could be extended.
●When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has
burst, the warning may not function.
469
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■The initialization operation (vehicles with the tire pressure warning
system)
●Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pres-
sure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire
inflation pressure adjustment.
●If you have accidentally turned the engine switch to the “LOCK” position
(vehicles without a smart key system) or off (vehicles with a smart key
system) during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch
again as initialization will restart automatically when the engine switch
has been turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key sys-
tem) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) for the
next time.
●If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not neces-
sary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the
tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.
■Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system (vehicles
with a multi-information display)
The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accor-
dance with the conditions under which it was initialized. For this reason,
the system may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a
low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was
adjusted to when the system was initialized.
■When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed (if
equipped)
Initialization may take longer to complete if the vehicle is driven on an
unpaved road. When performing initialization, drive on a paved road if
possible. Depending on the driving environment and condition of the tires,
initialization will be completed in approximately 10 minutes. If initialization
is not complete after driving approximately 10 minutes, continue driving
for a while.
If the inflation pressure of each tire is not displayed after driving for
approximately 1 hour, perform the following procedure.
●Park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes. Then
drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately
25mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 20 minutes.
However, in the following situations, the tire inflation pressure will not be
recorded and the system will not operate properly. Perform initialization
again.
●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure
warning light does not blink 3 times.
●After performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute then stays on while driving.
If the inflation pressure of each tire is still not displayed, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
470 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Tire pressure warning system certification (if equipped)
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAK
FCC ID: PAXPMVC015
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Model: PMV-C015
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
WARNING
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first
adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the
tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation
pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is
actually normal.
471
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps (vehicles with the tire pressure
warning system)
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
●Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not
installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the
tire pressure warning valves could be bound.
●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than
those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 463)
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing
the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads
may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s
wheels and body.
■If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
472 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are dis-
played on the tire and loading information label. (P. 577)
Tire inflation pressure
Access Cab models Double Cab models
473
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust
the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Put the tire valve cap back on.
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once
a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel economy
●Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
●Reduced tire life due to wear
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
Inspection and adjustment procedure
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
474 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire
inflation pressure reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appear-
ance.
●It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as
heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after
driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is
balanced.
WARNING
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur
which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Air leaking from between tire and wheel
●Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
●Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards,
expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and
cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.
475
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Wheels
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are
equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and
inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
●Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
●Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plas-
tic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)
476 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■When replacing wheels (vehicles with the tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters must be installed. (P. 463)
WARNING
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
■When installing the wheel nuts
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
■Use of defective wheels prohibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing
an accident.
●Be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered ends facing inward.
Installing the nuts with the tapered
ends facing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually cause
the wheel to come off while driving,
which could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
Tapered
portion
477
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles
with the tire pressure warning system)
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
478 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
Turn the engine switch off.
Open the glove box.
Remove the tray.
Remove the cover by sliding up
and then pull the cover toward
you.
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain
air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1
2
3
4
479
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Remove the filter cover.
Pull the filter out of the filter out-
let.
Remove the air conditioning filter
and replace it with a new one.
When installing the filter, follow the
instructions indicated on the label.
■Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement
may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
5
6
Replacement method
480 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
481
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Wireless remote control/electronic key bat-
tery
●Flathead screwdriver
●Small flathead screwdriver
●Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system), or
CR2032 (vehicles with a smart key system)
Vehicles without a smart key system
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
To prevent the buttons from being
disassembled, face the button sur-
face downward.
Remove the module.
: If equipped
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Replacing the battery
1
2
482 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape, etc.,
and remove the depleted bat-
tery using a small flathead
screwdriver.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
3
1
2
3
483
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system) or CR2032 (vehicles
with a smart key system) lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance
shops or camera stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manu-
facturer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
●The smart key system (if equipped) and wireless remote control will not
function properly.
●The operational range will be reduced.
WARNING
■Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,
they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
■Certification for the lithium battery
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN
INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO
THE INSTRUCTIONS
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
484 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
Turn the engine switch off.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tabs in and lift the
cover off.
Under the instrument panel
Remove the cover.
Remove the fuse with the pull-
out tool.
Only type A fuse can be removed
using the pullout tool.
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may
have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as nec-
essary.
1
2
3
485
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Check if the fuse is blown.
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rat-
ing. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box cover.
Type C:
Contact your Toyota dealer.
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 487)
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
4
1
2
Type A Type B
Type C
486 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or
injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use
any other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
●Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toy-
ota dealer as soon as possible.
487
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 578)
■Front
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty
level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary
bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toy-
ota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact
your Toyota dealer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Bulb locations
Headlight low beam
Headlight high beam
Front turn signal lights/parking lights (bulb type)/daytime running
lights (bulb type)
Front side marker lights
Fog lights (if equipped)
1
2
3
4
5
488 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Rear
Tail/rear turn signal/rear side marker lights
Stop/tail/rear side marker lights
Back up lights
License plate lights
High mounted stoplight (vehicles without a cargo lamp)
1
2
3
4
5
489
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■Headlight low beam
Unplug the connector while
pressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Set the new light bulb.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting and insert.
Turn it clockwise to set.
Install the connector.
After installing the connector,
shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn
the headlight low beams on
once and visually confirm that
no light is leaking through the
mounting.
Replacing light bulbs
1
2
3
4
490 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Headlight high beam
Unplug the connector while
pressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Set the new light bulb.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting and insert.
Turn it clockwise to set.
Install the connector.
After installing the connector,
shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn
the headlight high beams on
once and visually confirm that
no light is leaking through the
mounting.
1
2
3
4
491
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■Front side marker lights
To allow enough working
space, turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side of
the bulb to be replaced.
Remove the fender liner clip
and screw.
Turn the steering wheel to the
left when replacing the right side
light bulb, and turn the steering
wheel to the right when replac-
ing the left side light bulb.
Open the fender liner and
turn the bulb counterclock-
wise.
1
2
492 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the light bulb.
Reinstall the fender liner and install the clip and screw.
■Front turn signal lights/parking lights (bulb type)/daytime run-
ning lights (bulb type)
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
3
4
1
2
3
493
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■Front fog lights (if equipped)
To allow enough working
space, turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side of
the bulb to be replaced.
Remove the fender liner clip
and screw.
Turn the steering wheel to the
left when replacing the right side
light bulb, and turn the steering
wheel to the right when replac-
ing the left side light bulb.
Open the fender liner and
unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
1
2
494 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the bulb counterclock-
wise.
Set the new light bulb.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
Turn it clockwise to set.
Install the connector.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn
the fog lights, on once and visu-
ally confirm that no light is leak-
ing through the mounting.
Reinstall the fender liner and install the clip and screw.
3
4
5
6
495
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■Tail/rear turn signal/rear side marker lights, stop/tail/rear side
marker lights and back-up lights
Remove the bolts and rear
combination assembly.
Turn the bulb bases counter-
clockwise.
Tail/rear turn signal/rear
side marker lights
Stop/tail/rear side marker
lights
Back-up lights
Remove the light bulb.
Tail/rear turn signal/rear
side marker lights
Stop/tail/rear side marker
lights
Back-up lights
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
1
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
496 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■License plate lights
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
1
2
3
497
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
■High mounted stoplight (vehicles without a cargo lamp)
Remove the screws and
cover.
Remove the light bulb.
When reinstalling the outer lens,
confirm that the packing is prop-
erly seated in the groove on the
housing.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
■Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your Toyota dealer.
●Parking lights (LED type)
●Daytime running lights (LED type)
●High mounted stoplight (vehicles with cargo lamp)
●Side turn signal lights (if equipped)
1
2
3
498 7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■LED Lights
The side turn signal lights (if equipped), parking lights (LED type), daytime
running light (LED type) and, high mounted stoplight (vehicles with cargo
lamp) consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Toyota lamps are vented to all surrounding environmental conditions and may
experience temporary condensation build-up that is visible from outside of the
lamp. Condensation and fogging does not indicate a malfunction of the lamp
assembly. It is normal for condensation to improve and disappear after time
and normal driving use. Visible pools of water or large droplets are a sign of a
lamp in which the seal has malfunctioned. If this is the case or condensation
and fogging remain after long periods of time, contact your Toyota dealer for
more information.
WARNING
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is
unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth
to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the lights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
●Do not attempt to repair or disassemble the bulb, bulb base, electrical wir-
ing, or subcomponents.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury.
■To prevent damage or fire
●Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
●Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
499
8
When trouble arises
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .......... 500
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in
an emergency ................. 501
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ......................... 503
If you think something is
wrong .............................. 508
Fuel pump shut off
system ............................ 509
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds ............................ 510
If a warning message is
displayed (vehicles with
a multi-information
display) ........................... 519
If you have a flat tire.......... 536
If the engine will not
start................................. 551
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P
(vehicles with
an automatic
transmission) .................. 553
If the electronic key
does not operate properly
(vehicles with a smart key
system) ........................... 555
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ...................... 557
If your vehicle overheats ... 561
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ............................... 563
500 8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch
once again.
■Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not
operating, the battery may discharge.
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the
vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
501
8
When trouble arises
8-1. Essential information
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort
required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.
Vehicles without a smart key
system: Stop the engine by
turning the engine switch to the
“ACC” position.
Vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem: To stop the engine, press
and hold the engine switch for
2 consecutive seconds or more,
or press it briefly 3 times or
more in succession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the follow-
ing procedure:
1
2
3
4
3
4
4
5
502 8-1. Essential information
WARNING
■If the engine has to be turned off while driving
●Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
●Vehicles without a smart key system:
Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.
503
8
When trouble arises
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.
●The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle
towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service,
using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/
provincial and local laws.
Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing
Towing with a sling-type truck
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
504 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down
at the locations shown in the illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
Using a flatbed truck
Type A Type B
505
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency
towing hook(s). This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for at most 50 miles (80 km) at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drivetrain, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
Securely attach a cables or chains to the towing hook(s).
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
Vehicles without a smart key system:
Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
4WD models: Put the front-wheel drive control switch in “2WD”.
Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: When the shift lever can-
not be shifted. (P. 553)
■While towing
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will
not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
Emergency towing
Emergency towing procedure
1
Type A Type B
2
3
4
506 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■When towing the vehicle
2WD models: Be sure to transport the
vehicle with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed with the
tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain
and related parts may be damaged or an
accident may occur due to a change in
direction of the vehicle.
4WD models: Be sure to transport the
vehicle with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed with the
tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain
or related parts may be damaged, the
vehicle may fly off the truck.
■While towing
●When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc., which
place excessive stress on the towing hook(s), cables or chains. The tow-
ing hook(s), cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may
hit people, and cause serious damage.
●Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or off (vehicles with a smart key system).
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be
operated.
507
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
●Vehicles without a smart key system:
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is in the
“LOCK” position or the key is removed.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
●Vehicles with a smart key system:
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is off.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
●When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
508 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you think something is wrong
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher
than normal.
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the engine
●Engine misses, stumbling or running roughly
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle proba-
bly needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
509
8
When trouble arises
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles without a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or turn it off.
Restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or
when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off
system stops supply of fuel to the engine.
NOTICE
■Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
1
2
510 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then
goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the
system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Warning light and warning buzzer list
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system*1
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
Charging system warning light*2
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
Low engine oil pressure warning light*2
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The emission control system;
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
511
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Slip indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system;
• Trailer Sway Control system (if equipped);
• The TRAC system;
• The hill-start assist control system (if equipped);
• The active traction control system (if equipped);
• The AUTO LSD system; or
• The Crawl Control system (if equipped)
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Yellow)
Cruise control indicator light*2
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning
light*2, 3
When the light comes on:
Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid tempera-
ture is too high.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the
shift lever to P and wait until the light goes off.
If the light goes off, you may start the vehicle again. If
the light does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer.
When the light flashes:
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic transmission sys-
tem.
Have the system inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
512 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(Flashes rapidly)
Four-wheel drive indicator light*2, 4
Indicates that the differential oil temperature is too high
when the light flashes rapidly and a buzzer sound.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the
front-wheel drive control switch to “2WD”, and wait
until the warning light goes off.
Indicates a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system
when the light flashes rapidly and a buzzer does not
sound.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Flashes rapidly)
Rear differential lock indicator light*4, 5
Indicates a malfunction in the rear differential lock system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Flashes)
Low speed four-wheel drive indicator light*4, 6
Indicates a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Open door warning light*2
Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed.
Check that all the doors are closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates remaining fuel is approximately 3.2 gal. (12.0 L,
2.6 Imp.gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*7
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their
seat belts
Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front
passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to
make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator (warning buzzer)*8
Warns the driver to release parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
513
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
Master warning light (warning buzzer)*5
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
P. 519
(If equipped)
BSM warning light*2
Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Comes on or
flashes)
Brake Override System warning light*2
When the light comes on:
Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedals are being
depressed simultaneously, then the Brake Override Sys-
tem is operating (P. 156)
Release the accelerator or brake pedals.
When the light flashes:
Indicates a malfunction in the Brake Override System
(with warning buzzer)
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(If equipped)
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
• Natural causes (P. 516)
• Flat tire (P. 536)
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case
the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation
pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.
Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
(Canada)
Low windshield washer fluid warning light*2
Indicates low level of washer fluid
Fill the tank.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
514 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: The buzzer sounds when Multi-terrain Select or active traction control is
equipped.
*2: Vehicles without a multi-information display.
*3: Vehicles with an automatic transmission.
*4: 4WD models only
*5: Vehicles with a multi-information display.
*6: Vehicles without a multi-information display:
The light flashes rapidly in yellow to indicate a malfunction.
Vehicles with a multi-information display:
The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
Low engine oil level warning light*2, 9
Indicates that engine oil level is low
Check the level of engine oil and add more oil if nec-
essary.
(U.S.A.)
Maintenance required reminder light*2
Indicates that maintenance is required according to the
driven distance on the maintenance schedule.*10
Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about
15 seconds approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the
reminder light has been reset.
If necessary, perform maintenance.
Comes on and remains on if the distance driven exceeds
5000 miles (8000 km) after the reminder light has been
reset. (The indicator will not work properly unless the
reminder light has been reset.)
Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the
reminder light after the maintenance is performed.
(P. 441)
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
515
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
*7: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat
belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the “ON” or
“START” position mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle
reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat
belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently
for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will
sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger
that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the
vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is sill unfas-
tened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 20 more seconds.
*8: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h) or more.
*9: 2GR-FKS engine only
*10: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact
sensors, side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat
position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
pretensioners assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (P. 36)
■Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning
buzzer
●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detec-
tion sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to
sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger,
and the warning light may not operate properly.
516 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on (if equipped)
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Push-
ing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure
warning light.
■The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
(if equipped)
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temper-
ature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after several minutes).
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with the tire pres-
sure warning system)
The temporary spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the temporary
spare tire. Replace the temporary spare tire with the repaired tire and
adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off
after several minutes.
■Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function
properly (if equipped)
P. 4 6 8
■If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking
for 1 minute (if equipped)
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1
minute when the engine switch is turned to “ON” position (vehicles with-
out a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart
key system), have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an
audio sound.
517
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
WARNING
■If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota
dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the
ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on (if equipped)
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a
loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire infla-
tion pressure immediately.
●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire
is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the
nearest Toyota dealer.
●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with the tire
pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
■Maintenance of the tires (vehicles with the tire pressure warning
system)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a dif-
ferent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
518 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warn-
ing system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunc-
tion indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly (if
equipped)
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire
pressure warning system may not operate properly.
519
8
When trouble arises
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed (vehicles
with a multi-information display)
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is cur-
rently being displayed on the multi-
information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning light comes on again after the following actions
have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm
and perform the following actions:
1
2
Warning message and warning buzzer list
Warning message Details/Actions
Indicates the following:
• The brake fluid level is low; or,
• The brake system is malfunctioning*1.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Toyota dealer.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
520 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(If equipped)
Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid
temperature is too high.
A buzzer also sounds.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, shift the shift lever to P and wait until
the message and light go off.
If the message and light go off, you may
start the vehicle again.
If the message and light do not go off, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is
too high.
A buzzer also sounds.
P. 561
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
The warning light may come on if the engine oil
pressure is too low.
A buzzer also sounds.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Toyota dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging
system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing
to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
Warning message Details/Actions
521
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system;
• Trailer Sway Control system (if equipped);
• The TRAC system;
• The hill-start assist control system (if
equipped);
• The active traction control system (if
equipped);
• The AUTO LSD system; or
• The Crawl Control system (if equipped)
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the tire pressure moni-
toring system.
The tire pressure warning light comes on after
flashing for 1 minute.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Warning message Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
(Flashes and then
remains on)
522 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control sys-
tem.
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate
the system, and then press the button again to
reactivate the system.
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the Brake Override
System.
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
(2GR-FKS engine only)
Indicates that the engine oil level is low.
A buzzer also sounds.
Check the level of engine oil, and add if
necessary.
This message may appear if the vehicle is
stopped on a slope.
Move the vehicle to a level surface and
check to see if the message disappears.
Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedals
are being depressed simultaneously, then the
Brake Override System is operating. (P. 156)
Release the accelerator or brake pedals.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
523
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
(If equipped)
Indicates that the tire inflation pressure is low.
Check the tire inflation pressure, and
adjust to the appropriate level.
(Canada only)
Indicates that the washer fluid level is low.
Add washer fluid.
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately
3.2 gal. (12.0 L, 2.6 Imp.gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
(4WD models only)
Indicates that the transfer mode may not suc-
cessfully change.
Operate the front-wheel drive control
switch again. (P. 244)
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
524 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(4WD models only)
Indicates that the front differential oil temperature
is too high.
Drop your speed or stop the vehicle until
the message and light go off. If the mes-
sage and light do not go off, contact your
Toyota dealer.
(4WD models only)
Indicates that the front differential oil temperature
is too high.
Turn the front-wheel drive control switch to
“2WD” (P. 244) and drop your speed or
stop the vehicle until the message and light
go off. If the message and light do not go
off, contact your Toyota dealer.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the Crawl Control is canceled while
in use.
A buzzer also sounds.
Use the Crawl Control under the proper
operating conditions. (P. 259)
Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully
closed.
The system also indicates which doors are not
fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h), flashes and a buzzer
sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not
yet fully closed.
Make sure that all the doors are closed.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
525
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
(If equipped)
Indicates that the hood is not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h), flashes and a buzzer
sounds to indicate that the hood is not yet
fully closed.
Close the hood.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking
assist.
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is flashing.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
(If equipped)
Indicates that intuitive parking assist is dirty or
covered with ice.
Clean the sensor.
Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h), flashes and a buzzer
sounds to indicate that the parking brake is
still engaged.
Release the parking brake.
Warning message Details/Actions
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
526 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the smart key system.
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
(If equipped)
Indicates that a Blind Spot Monitor sensor or the
surrounding area on the bumper is dirty or cov-
ered with ice.
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor and its surrounding area
on the bumper.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the BSM (Blind Spot
Monitor) system.
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Indicates that the engine switch is turned to the
“LOCK” or “ACC” position (vehicles without a
smart key system), or off or ACCESSORY mode
(vehicles with a smart key system) and the
driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned
on.
Turn the lights off.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
527
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
(If equipped)
Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed
(with the engine switch off, and the driver’s door
open).
A buzzer also sounds.
Close the moon roof.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the Crawl Control is not available.
Select the four-wheel drive control switch
in “4L” and shift the shift lever to D or R.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the Crawl Control is not available.
Confirm the operating conditions of Crawl
Control. (P. 259)
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all maintenance according to the
driven distance on the maintenance schedule*
should be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km)
after the message has been reset.
If necessary, perform maintenance.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
528 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all maintenance is required to cor-
respond to the driven distance on the mainte-
nance schedule*2.
Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km)
after the message has been reset. (The indicator
will not work properly unless the message has
been reset.)
Perform the necessary maintenance.
Please reset the message after the mainte-
nance is performed. (P. 441)
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that the system fails to reset.
A buzzer also sounds.
Resetting the maintenance data again.
(P. 441)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the transfer mode needs to be
changed to “4L”.
Turn the front-wheel drive control switch to
“4L”.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the VSC and active traction control
cannot be disabled while Multi-terrain Select is
operating.
While the Multi-terrain Select is in use, VSC
and active traction control cannot be
turned off.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the Multi-terrain Select cannot be
operated because the VSC and/or 4WD system
may be malfunctioning.
Contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning message Details/Actions
529
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
*1: The buzzer sounds when Multi-terrain Select or active traction control is
equipped.
*2: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function
properly (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)
P. 4 6 8
■Warning buzzer
P. 516
(If equipped)
Indicates that the Multi-terrain Select is canceled
while in use.
A buzzer also sounds.
Use the Multi-terrain Select under the
proper operating conditions. (P. 255)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the Multi-terrain Select cannot be
operated because Crawl Control is operating.
Turn Crawl Control off. (P. 259)
Warning message Details/Actions
530 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning message and light go off.
Have the malfunction repaired immediately. (vehicles with a
smart key system)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details/Actions
Contin-
uous
The driver’s door was opened
when the shift lever was not in
P and the engine switch was
not turned off.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Contin-
uous
Contin-
uous
The driver’s door was opened
and closed while the elec-
tronic key was not in the vehi-
cle, the shift lever was not in P
and the engine switch was not
turned off.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Bring the electronic key
back into the vehicle.
(Flashes)
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
531
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
Once 3 times
The driver’s door was opened
and closed while the elec-
tronic key was not in the vehi-
cle, the shift lever was in P
and the engine switch was not
turned off.
Turn the engine switch
off.
Bring the electronic key
back into the vehicle.
The electronic key was carried
outside the vehicle and a door
other than the driver’s door
was opened and closed while
the engine switch was in a
mode other than off.
Bring the electronic key
back into the vehicle.
Once Contin-
uous
An attempt was made to exit
the vehicle with the electronic
key and lock the doors without
first turning the engine switch
off when the shift lever was in
P.
Turn the engine switch
off and lock the doors
again.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
532 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
The electronic key is not
detected when an attempt is
made to start the engine.
Start the engine with the
electronic key present.
9 times
An attempt was made to drive
when the electronic key was
not inside the vehicle.
Confirm that the elec-
tronic key is inside the
vehicle.
Contin-
uous
An attempt was made to lock
the doors using the smart key
system while the electronic
key was still inside the vehicle.
Retrieve the electronic
key from the vehicle and
lock the doors again.
Once Contin-
uous
An attempt was made to lock
either front door by opening a
door and putting the inside
lock button into the lock posi-
tion, then closing the door with
the electronic key still inside
the vehicle.
Retrieve the electronic
key from the vehicle and
lock the doors again.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
533
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
Once
The electronic key has a low
battery.
Replace the electronic
key battery. (P. 481)
Once
The steering lock could not be
released within 3 seconds of
the engine switch being
pressed.
Press the engine switch
while depressing the
brake pedal and moving
the steering wheel left
and right.
Once
• When the doors were
unlocked with the mechani-
cal key and then the engine
switch was pressed, the
electronic key could not be
detected in the vehicle.
• The electronic key could not
be detected in the vehicle
even after the engine switch
was pressed two consecu-
tive times.
Touch the electronic key
to the engine switch
while depressing the
brake pedal.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
534 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
Indicates that:
• With the engine switch off,
the doors were unlocked
and then the driver’s door
was opened and closed
• The engine switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode without starting the
engine
Press the engine switch
while depressing the
brake pedal.
Once
The engine switch has been
turned off with the shift lever in
a position other than P.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Once
After the engine switch has
been turned off with the shift
lever in a position other than
P, the shift lever has been
shifted to P.
Turn the engine switch
off.
 
Power was turned off due to
the automatic power off func-
tion.
Next time when starting
the engine, increase the
engine speed slightly and
maintain that level for
approximately 5 minutes
to recharge the battery.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
535
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
■Warning buzzer
P. 516
Once
During a engine starting pro-
cedure in the event that the
electronic key was not func-
tioning properly (P. 555), the
engine switch was touched
with the electronic key.
Press the engine switch
within 10 seconds of the
buzzer sounding.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
536 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual
transmission).
●Stop the engine.
●Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 500)
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be
replaced with the spare tire.
For details about tires: P. 4 6 2
WARNING
■If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
537
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
■Spare tire
■Jack and tools
Tool bag
Jack
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
1
2
Access Cab models Double Cab models
538 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off
the jack, leading to death or serious injury.
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
●Put the jack properly in its jack point.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack.
●Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is sup-
ported by the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
●When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the
vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.
■Using the jack handle
Insert the square head securely until you hear a click to prevent the
extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.
539
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
Vehicles with rear seats:
Pull up the lever and raise the
bottom cushion up.
Turn the knob counterclock-
wise.
Open the lid.
Vehicles with rear seats:
Press the lid against the bottom
of the lower cushion until it is
supported by the hook-and-loop
fastener.
Make sure that the lid is supported
to prevent it from closing unexpect-
edly.
Unhook the rubber band and
remove the tool bag.
Taking out the jack and tool bag (Access Cab models)
1
2
3
4
540 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Unhook the rubber band and
take out the jack.
For loosening
For tightening
Swing the bottom cushion up by
pulling the lock release strap.
Turn the knob counterclockwise
and open the lid.
Unhook the rubber band and
remove the tool bag.
5
1
2
Taking out the jack and tool bag (Double Cab models)
1
2
3
541
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
Unhook the rubber band and
take out the jack.
For loosening
For tightening
Assemble the jack handle
extension as shown.
Insert the end of the jack han-
dle extension into the lowering
screw and turn it counterclock-
wise.
After the tire is lowered com-
pletely to the ground, remove
the holding bracket.
4
1
2
Taking out the spare tire
1
2
3
542 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Chock the tires.
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Assemble the jack handle
extension as shown.
Replacing a flat tire
1
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
2
3
543
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
Position the jack at the correct
jack point as shown.
Front
Rear
Make sure the jack is positioned
on a level and solid place.
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
When positioning the jack under
the rear axle housing, make sure
the groove on the top of the jack
fits with the rear axle housing.
Make sure to use only the jack
point indicated.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
4
1
2
5
6
544 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, causing the tire to come
off.
WARNING
■Replacing a flat tire
●Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury:
• Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it
from under the vehicle.
• Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in
handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi-
ately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area
around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with
hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc., may
result in burns.
●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 83 ft·lbf
(113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifi-
cally designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off
the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the
tapered ends facing inward. (P. 476)
Installing the spare tire
1
545
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
Replacing a steel wheel with a spare steel wheel
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel sheet.
Replacing an aluminum wheel with a spare steel wheel
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel sheet.
Replacing an aluminum wheel with a spare aluminum wheel
Tighten the nuts until the washer
of the nut comes into loose con-
tact with the disc wheel.
2
546 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown
in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)
3
4
WARNING
■Stowing the flat tire
Failure to follow steps listed under stowing the tire may result in damage
to the spare tire carrier and loss of the tire, which could result in death or
serious injury.
547
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
Remove the center wheel ornament by pushing from the reverse
side.
Lay down the tire with the valve
stem facing up and install the
holding bracket, inserting the
claw into the wheel lug nut hole.
Turn the jack handle extension
clockwise to take up slack in
the chain.
Then, check to ensure the claw is
in the wheel lug nut hole and the
holding bracket is centered in the
wheel hub.
Holding bracket
Claw
While raising, secure the tire, tak-
ing care that the tire goes straight
up without catching on any sur-
rounding parts, to prevent it from
flying forward during a collision or
sudden braking.
Tightening torque:
27.6 ft·lbf (37.4 N·m, 3.8 kgf·m)
Confirm it is not loose after
tightening:
Push and pull the tire
Try rotating
Visually check to ensure tire is
not hung on surrounding parts.
If looseness or misassembly exists, repeat step and step .
Repeat step , any time the tire is lowered or disturbed.
Stow the tools and jack securely.
Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
2 3
4 3
5
548 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■The temporary spare tire
●The temporary spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” on the disc wheel.
Use the temporary spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
●Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the temporary spare
tire. (P. 577)
■After completing the tire change (vehicles with the tire pressure
warning system)
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 464)
■When using the temporary spare tire (vehicles with the tire pressure
warning system)
As the temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the
temporary spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the temporary spare tire on one of the front wheels of the vehicle.
Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires:
Replace a front tire with the temporary spare tire.
Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the
vehicle.
Fit tire chains to the rear tires.
1
2
3
549
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
WARNING
■When using the temporary spare tire
●Remember that the temporary spare tire provided is specifically
designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your temporary spare
tire on another vehicle.
●Do not use more than one temporary spare tires simultaneously.
●Replace the temporary spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shift-
ing operations that cause sudden engine braking.
■When the spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys-
tems may not operate correctly:
●ABS & Brake assist
●VSC
●TRAC
●AUTO LSD
●Hill-start assist control (if equipped)
●Cruise control (if equipped)
●Active traction control system (if equipped)
●Multi Terrain ABS (if equipped)
●Multi-terrain Select (if equipped)
●Crawl Control (if equipped)
●Navigation system (if equipped)
Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, but it may
even negatively affect the drive-train components:
●4WD system
■Speed limit when using the temporary spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a temporary
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Fail-
ure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or
serious injury.
550 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
■Driving with tire chains and the temporary spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the temporary spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
■When replacing the tires (vehicles with the tire pressure warning
system)
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters (if equipped)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 463)
551
8
When trouble arises
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
●The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(P. 187, 190)
●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(if equipped) (P. 69)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 557)
●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical
problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an interim
measure is available to start the engine. (P. 552)
If the engine will not start even though correct starting proce-
dures are being followed (P. 187, 190), consider each of the fol-
lowing points.
The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates
normally.
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and head-
lights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low
volume.
The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with a smart key
system)
552 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 557)
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system (vehicles
with a smart key system).
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair
procedures are unknown.
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning
normally:
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while
depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart key system)
1
2
3
4
553
8
When trouble arises
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
(vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles without a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake
pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a sys-
tem to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:
1
2
3
4
554 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted while
the button is pressed.
5
555
8
When trouble arises
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate
properly (vehicles with a smart key system)
Use the mechanical key (
P. 104)
in order to perform the following
operations:
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
Touch the Toyota emblem side
of the electronic key to the
engine switch.
If any of the doors is opened or
closed while the key is being
touched to the switch, an alarm will
sound to indicate that the start
function cannot detect the key.
Press the engine switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Toyota
dealer.
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is
interrupted (P. 124) or the electronic key cannot be used
because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wire-
less remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors
can be opened and the engine can be started by following the
procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors
1
2
Starting the engine
1
2
3
556 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when
stopping the engine.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 481)
■Changing engine switch modes
Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press
the engine switch.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed. (P. 191)
557
8
When trouble arises
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the
steps below.
Confirm that the key is being
carried.
When connecting the jumper (or
booster) cables, depending on the
situation, the alarm may activate
and the doors may lock. (P. 80)
Open the hood. (P. 448)
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
2TR-FE engine
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the
vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.
1
2
3
558 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
2GR-FKS engine
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on your vehicle.
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the
positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery termi-
nal on the second vehicle.
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a
solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery
and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with a smart key system only: Open and close any of the
doors of your vehicle with the engine switch off.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the
engine of your vehicle by turning the engine switch to the “ON”
position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in
the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
559
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
■Starting the engine when the battery is discharged (vehicles with an
automatic transmission)
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■To prevent battery discharge
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running
at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-
tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may
discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges
automatically during driving.)
■When recharging or replacing the battery
●Vehicles with a smart key system: In some cases, it may not be possible to
unlock the doors using the smart key system when the battery is dis-
charged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or
unlock the doors.
●The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged
but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
●Vehicles with a smart key system: The engine switch mode is memorized by
the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the
mode it was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the
battery, turn the engine switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery dis-
charged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.
560 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery:
●Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
●Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” termi-
nal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area,
such as brackets or unpainted metal.
●Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
●Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery:
●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
●Do not lean over the battery.
●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the battery.
■To prevent damage to the vehicle
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the three-way catalytic converter
may overheat and become a fire hazard.
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entan-
gled in the cooling fan or belt.
561
8
When trouble arises
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
●The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 88)
enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For
example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
●“High Engine Coolant Temperature” is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display. (if equipped)
●Steam comes out from under the hood.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning sys-
tem, and then stop the engine.
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, inspect the
hoses and radiator core (radia-
tor) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
The coolant level is satisfactory
if it is between the “FULL” and
“LOW” lines on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL”
“LOW”
Radiator cap
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:
Correction procedures
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
2
3
4
562 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if coolant is unavailable.
Start the engine to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and
to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.
5
WARNING
■When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the fans, etc., while the engine is run-
ning.
●Do not loosen the radiator cap and the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
●Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust,
etc.).
●Do not use any coolant additives.
6
7
563
8
When trouble arises
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P
(automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction
under the rear wheels.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to D or R (automatic transmission), or 1 or R
(manual transmission) and release the parking brake. Then, while
exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
■When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Press to turn off TRAC.
Turn off TRAC/active traction control system (if equipped) and/or VSC if these
functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. (P. 265, 266)
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
WARNING
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the
surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
■When shifting the shift lever (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
1
2
3
4
5
564 8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
●Vehicles without a multi-information display: When the automatic transmis-
sion fluid temperature warning light comes on while attempting to free a
stuck vehicle, immediately remove your foot from the accelerator pedal
and wait until the warning light turns off. Otherwise, the transmission may
become damaged. (P. 511)
●Vehicles with a multi-information display: When a warning message for the
automatic transmission fluid temperature is displayed while attempting to
free a stuck vehicle, immediately remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal and wait until the warning message disappears. Otherwise, the
transmission may become damaged. (P. 520)
565
9
Vehicle specifications
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 566
Fuel information ................ 579
Tire information ................. 582
9-2. Customization
Customizable features ...... 592
9-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize ............... 599
566 9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
*1: Unladen vehicle
*2: P265/60R18 tires
*3: Vehicles with a over fender
■TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
P. 1 72
Dimensions
Cab type Access Cab
Overall length 212.3 in. (5392.3 mm)
Overall width 74.4 in. (1890.5 mm)
Overall height
*
170.6 in. (1792.2 mm)
Wheelbase 127.8 in. (3247 mm)
Front tread 63.0 in. (1599 mm)
63.3 in. (1609 mm)*2
Rear tread 63.2 in. (1606 mm)
63.6 in. (1616 mm)*2
Cab type Double Cab
With short deck With long deck
Overall length 212.3 in. (5392.3 mm) 225.5 in. (5727.3 mm)
Overall width 74.4 in. (1890.5 mm)
75.2 in. (1910.3 mm)*3
Overall height
*
170.6 in. (1792.2 mm)
Wheelbase 127.8 in. (3247 mm) 141.0 in. (3582 mm)
Front tread 63.0 in. (1599 mm)
63.3 in. (1609 mm)*2
Rear tread 63.2 in. (1606 mm)
63.6 in. (1616 mm)*2
567
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
Access Cab models
*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P. 569)
*2: Installing accessories in addition to those installed at the factory
increases vehicle weight, thereby reducing vehicle capacity weight. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer about the weight of accessory parts.
Vehicle capacity weight
Model code*1Engine Driving
system Deck type
Vehicle capacity
weight
(Occupants +
luggage)*2
TRN265L-CRTSKA
2TR-FE
engine
2WD
Long
deck
1500 lb.
(680 kg)
TRN245L-CRMSKA
4WD
1350 lb.
(610 kg)
TRN245L-CRTSKA 1300 lb.
(585 kg)
GRN325L-CRTSHA
2GR-FKS
engine
2WD 1400 lb.
(635 kg)
GRN305L-CRFSHA
4WD
1100 lb.
(495 kg)
GRN305L-CRTSHA 1150 lb.
(520 kg)
568 9-1. Specifications
Double Cab models
*1: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P. 569)
*2: Installing accessories in addition to those installed at the factory
increases vehicle weight, thereby reducing vehicle capacity weight. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer about the weight of accessory parts.
Model code*1Engine Driving
system Deck type
Vehicle capacity
weight
(Occupants +
luggage)*2
TRN265L-PRTSKA 2TR-FE
engine
2WD
Short
deck
1400 lb.
(635 kg)
GRN325L-PRTSHA
2GR-FKS
engine
1200 lb.
(540 kg)
GRN325L-PRTLHA 1250 lb.
(565 kg)
GRN330L-PRTSHA Long
deck
1200 lb.
(540 kg)
GRN330L-PRTLHA 1200 lb.
(540 kg)
GRN305L-PRFSHA
4WD
Short
deck
950 lb.
(430 kg)
GRN305L-PRTSHA 1000 lb.
(450 kg)
GRN305L-PRTLHA 1000 lb.
(450 kg)
GRN310L-PRTSHA Long
deck
950 lb.
(430 kg)
GRN310L-PRTLHA 950 lb.
(430 kg)
569
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
■Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toy-
ota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
Vehicle identification
Access Cab models Double Cab models
2TR-FE engine 2GR-FKS engine
570 9-1. Specifications
2TR-FE engine
2GR-FKS engine
Engine
Model 2TR-FE
Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.74 3.74 in. (95.0 95.0 mm)
Displacement 164.3 cu.in. (2694 cm3)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Valve clearance
(engine cold) Automatic adjustment
Model 2GR-FKS
Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.70 x 3.28 in. (94.0 x 83.0 mm)
Displacement 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Valve clearance
(engine cold) Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
(Unleaded gasoline) 87 (Research octane number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 21.1 gal. (80.0 L, 17.6 Imp.gal.)
571
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toy-
ota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill—reference*)With filter Without filter
2TR-FE engine 6.2 qt.
(5.9 L, 5.2 Imp.qt.)
5.8 qt.
(5.5 L, 4.8 Imp.qt.)
2GR-FKS
engine
without towing
package
6.1 qt.
(5.8 L, 5.1 Imp.qt.) 5.9 qt.
(5.6 L, 4.9 Imp.qt.)
with towing
package
6.2 qt.
(5.9 L, 5.2 Imp.qt.)
572 9-1. Specifications
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting
of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Commit-
tee (ILSAC) Certification Mark
is added to some oil containers
to help you select the oil you
should use.
573
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
Cooling system
Capacity
2TR-FE
engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
9.1 qt. (8.6 L, 7.6 Imp.qt.)
Vehicles with a manual transmission
9.2 qt. (8.7 L, 7.7 Imp.qt.)
2GR-FKS
engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Without towing package:
10.5 qt. (9.9 L, 8.7 Imp.qt.)
With towing package:
11.1 qt. (10.5 L, 9.2 Imp.qt.)
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Without towing package:
10.1 qt. (9.6 L, 8.4 Imp.qt.)
With towing package:
10.8 qt. (10.2 L, 9.0 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make 2TR-FE engine
DENSO FK20HR-A8
2GR-FKS engine
DENSO FK20HBR8
Gap 0.031 in. (0.8 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
574 9-1. Specifications
*1: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at
the factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or
an equivalent oil of matching quality to satisfy the above specification.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
*2: Except for GRN330L-PRTSHA, GRN330L-PRTLHA, GRN310L-PRTSHA
and GRN310L-PRTLHA models*6 without rear differential lock system
*3: For GRN330L-PRTSHA, GRN330L-PRTLHA, GRN310L-PRTSHA and
GRN310L-PRTLHA models*6 without rear differential lock system
*4: Except for GRN330L-PRTSHA, GRN330L-PRTLHA, GRN310L-PRTSHA
and GRN310L-PRTLHA models*6 with rear differential lock system
*5: For GRN330L-PRTSHA and GRN310L-PRTSHA models*6 with rear differ-
ential lock system
*6: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P. 569)
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at 68F
(20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine
and all lights are turned off.)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Differential
Oil capacity
(Reference)
Front (4WD models) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Rear
Vehicles with an automatic trans-
mission
3.1 qt. (2.9 L, 2.6 Imp.qt.)*2
3.22 qt. (3.05 L, 2.68 Imp.qt.)*3
4.0 qt. (3.8 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)*4
4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp.qt.)*5
Vehicles with a manual transmis-
sion
4.0 qt. (3.8 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*1Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil
LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
575
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
Automatic transmission
Fluid
capacity*
2TR-FE engine 9.1 qt. (8.6 L, 7.6 Imp.qt.)
2GR-FKS engine
Vehicles without towing package:
10.5 qt. (9.9 L, 8.7 Imp.qt.)
Vehicles with towing package:
10.7 qt. (10.1 L, 8.9 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of the transmission accompanied by
vibration and, ultimately, damage to the vehicle’s transmission.
Manual transmission
Gear oil
capacity
(Reference)
2TR-FE engine 2.3 qt. (2.2 L, 1.9 Imp.qt.)
2GR-FKS engine 2.6 qt. (2.5 L, 2.2 Imp.qt.)
Gear oil type
Toyota Genuine Manual Transmis-
sion Gear Oil GL-3 (GL-4) or equiva-
lent
Recommended gear oil viscosity SAE 75W-90
Cluch
Clutch free play 0.2 — 0.6 in. (5 — 15 mm)
Fluid type FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
576 9-1. Specifications
*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” at
the factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” or
an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please
contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N,
50 kgf) with the engine running.
*2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 44.9 lbf (200 N,
20.4 kgf).
Transfer (4WD models)
Oil capacity 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp.qt.)
Oil type*Toyota Genuine Transfer gear oil LF or
equivalent
Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W
Brakes
Pedal clearance*1
Vehicles without off-road package:
4.4 in. (111 mm) Min.
Vehicles with off-road package:
3.6 in. (91 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lever travel*25 — 7 clicks
Fluid type FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
Chassis lubrication
Propeller shafts Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Steering
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Power steering fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III
577
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
Type A
Type B
Type C
Tires and wheels
Tire size P245/75R16 109S
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Front tires:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear tires:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare tire:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 16 7 J, 16 7 JJ
Wheel nut torque 83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)
Tire size 265/70R16 112T
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Front tires:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear tires:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare tire:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 16 7 J, 16 7 JJ
Wheel nut torque 83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)
Tire size P265/65R17 110S, P265/60R18 109H
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Front tires:
29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear tires:
29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare tire:
29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 7 1/2 J, 17 7 1/2 JJ, 18 7 1/2 J
Wheel nut torque 83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)
578 9-1. Specifications
*1: If equipped
*2: Bulb type only
*3: Parking lights/daytime running lights are LED type
*4: Vehicles without a cargo lamp
A: H11 halogen bulbs
B: H9 halogen bulbs
C: H16 halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
F: Double end bulbs
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs Bulb No. WType
Exterior
Headlights
Low beam
High beam
H11
H9
55
65
A
B
Front fog lights*1
Normal type
Wide angle type
H16
H11
19
55
C
A
Front side marker lights W5W 5 E
Front turn signal lights/
parking lights*2/
daytime running lights*27442NA 28/8 D
Front turn signal lights*3WY21W 21 D
Stop/tail/rear side marker
lights 7443 21/5 E
Tail/rear turn signal/rear
side marker lights 7443 21/5 E
Back-up lights W16W 16 E
License plate lights W5W 5 E
High mounted stoplight*4168 5 E
Interior
Vanity lights*17065 5 F
Front personal/interior
lights W5W 5 E
Rear interior light — 8 F
579
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
Fuel information
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gaso-
line you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed
a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC),
which is expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
■Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to
clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concen-
tration program.
●Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For
more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers,
please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.
■Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as
reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically
acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.
Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced
vehicle emissions.
You must only use unleaded gasoline.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87
may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to
engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A..
580 9-1. Specifications
■Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
●If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
●Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this
happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Toyota dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerat-
ing or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
●Use only gasoline containing up to 15%
ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 15% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E30, E50, E85 (which are only some
examples of fuel containing more than
15% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline contain-
ing more than 15% ethanol.
(30% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
581
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the
level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is
encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that
type of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
582 9-1. Specifications
Tire information
Tire size (P. 583)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 583)
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 462)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 587)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 587)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire.
A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL”
is a bias-ply tire.
Summer tire or all season tire (P. 467)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S”
is a summer tire.
Typical tire symbols
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
583
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index
(2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Tire size
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
584 9-1. Specifications
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
1
2
3
Tire section names
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
585
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
586 9-1. Specifications
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-
pate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
587
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which
a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall
of the tire
Recommended infla-
tion pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1*
that follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy
duty battery, and special trim
588 9-1. Specifications
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share of
the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and
dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share of
curb weight, accessory weight, and normal
occupant weight (distributed in accordance
with Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between compo-
nents in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate
angles substantially less than 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Tire related term Meaning
589
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber
compounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and
the tire is designed to fit on the underside of
the rim in a manner that encloses the rim
flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
metrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as pri-
marily intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Tire related term Meaning
590 9-1. Specifications
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall,
or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including ele-
vations due to labeling, decorations, or protec-
tive bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars,
multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks,
that have a gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Tire related term Meaning
591
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
*: Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-
1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and
which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( )
on at least one sidewall
Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Tire related term Meaning
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution
in a normally loaded
vehicle
2 through 4 22 in front
5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 52 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 72 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
592 9-2. Customization
Customizable features
■Changing by using the multimedia system
Press the “APPS” button.
Select “Setup” on the “Apps” screen.
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Select “Vehicle Customization” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
“Vehicle Customization” screen will appear.
Choose a category displayed on the screen to display the set-
tings.
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be
personalized to your preferences. The settings of these features
can be changed using the multi-information display, the multi-
media system, or at your Toyota dealer.
Customizing vehicle features
1
Entune Audio Plus Entune Premium Audio
2
3
4
5
593
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
Select the setting to be changed. Change each setting.
For items that can be enabled/disabled, and for items with an
operating time that can be changed, select “On” or “Off”, or select
the desired operating time.
For items with sensor sensitivity that can be changed, select “+”
or “-” to choose the desired level, then select “OK”.
A message indicating that the settings are being saved will
appear. Do not perform any other operations while this message
is displayed.
■Changing by using the multi-information display
Select using the meter control switch.
Select an item and then set it with the center button.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func-
tions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display.
Settings that can be changed using the multimedia system.
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer.
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
■Gauges, meters and multi-information display*1 (P. 88, 93)
Customizable features
6
7
1
2
1
2
3
Function*2Default setting Customized
setting
Language*3English French OOO
Spanish
Units*3miles (MPG US)
km (km/L)
OOO
km (L/100 km)
miles (MPG Impe-
rial)
123
594 9-2. Customization
*1: Vehicles with a multi-information display
*2: For details about each function: P. 96
*3: The default setting varies according to country.
*4: Speed limit display may not be available for some regions.
*5: For U.S.A. only
Drive information 1
Digital speedom-
eter
6 of the following
items: P. 9 4
O — O
Distance to empty
Drive information 2
Average fuel
economy (after
reset) O — O
Current fuel econ-
omy
Drive information 3
Trip distance
(after reset) O — O
Trip elapsed time
Pop-up display On Off O — O
Accent color Light blue
Blue
OOOOrange
Yellow
Speed limit display*4
On with the speed
limit caution indi-
cator (yellow)
enabled
On with the speed
limit caution indi-
cator (yellow) not
enabled O — O
Off
Maintenance sys-
tem initialization*5Off On O — O
Function*2Default setting Customized
setting
123
595
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
■Door lock (P. 109, 555)
*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission
■Smart key system and wireless remote control* (P. 109)
*: If equipped
Function Default setting Customized
setting
Unlocking using a key
Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in
one step
——O
Speed-detecting auto-
matic door lock function*On Off — O O
Shifting gears to position
other than P locks all
doors*Off On — O O
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors*On Off — O O
Opening the driver’s door
unlocks all doors*Off On — O O
1 2 3
Function Default setting Customized
setting
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) On Off — O O
Operation signal
(Buzzer) On Off — — O
Operation buzzer volume Level 5 Off to level 7 O O O
Time elapsed before auto-
matic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
60 seconds
Off
—OO
30 seconds
120 seconds
Open door warning
buzzer On Off — — O
1 2 3
596 9-2. Customization
■Smart key system* (P. 109, 121)
*: If equipped
■Wireless remote control* (P. 103, 109)
*: If equipped
Function Default setting Customized
setting
Smart key system On Off — — O
Number of permissible
times of continuous smart
lock
Twice Unlimited — — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting Customized
setting
Wireless remote control On Off — — O
Unlocking operation
Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in
one step
—OO
Automatic door lock func-
tion to be activated if door
is not opened after being
unlocked
On Off — — O
Time elapsed before auto-
matic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
60 seconds
0 seconds
—OO30 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) On Off — O O
Operation signal
(Buzzer) On Off — — O
Panic function On Off — — O
Open door reminder
buzzer (When locking the
vehicle)
On Off — — O
1 2 3
597
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
■Automatic light off system* (P. 203)
*: If equipped
■Illumination (P. 385)
*: Vehicles with a smart key system
■Intuitive parking assist* (P. 220)
*: If equipped
Function Default setting Customized
setting
Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5 — O O
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
30 seconds
0 seconds
—OO60 seconds
90 seconds
1 2 3
Function Default setting Customized
setting
Time elapsed before lights
turn off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds —OO
30 seconds
Operation after the engine
is off On Off — — O
Operation when the doors
are unlocked On Off — — O
Operation when you
approach the vehicle with
the electronic key on your
person*
On Off — — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting Customized
setting
Detection distance of the
rear center sensor Far Near — O O
Buzzer Volume Level 3 Level 1 to 5 — O O
Display setting All sensors
displayed Display off — O O
1 2 3
598 9-2. Customization
■Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer (P. 512)
■Vehicle customization
●When the speed-detecting automatic door lock function and shift position
linked door locking function (shifting gears to a position other than P locks
all doors) are both on, the door lock operates as follows.
• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will
be locked.
• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the speed-detecting auto-
matic door lock function would not operate.
• If the vehicle is started with any the door unlocked, the speed-detecting
automatic door lock function will operate.
●When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the automatic
door lock function (Time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is
activated if a door is not opened after being unlocked) activates, the signals
will be generated in accordance with operation signal (buzzers) and the
operation signal (emergency flashers) settings.
Function Default setting Customized
setting
Vehicle speed linked seat
belt reminder buzzer On Off — — O
WARNING
■During customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may
collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or serious health haz-
ard.
NOTICE
■During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while cus-
tomizing features.
1 2 3
599
9-3. Items to initialize
9
Vehicle specifications
Items to initialize
*1: If equipped
*2: For U.S.A. only
The following items must be initialized for normal system opera-
tion after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or main-
tenance being performed on the vehicle:
Item When to initialize Reference
Moon roof*1• After reconnecting or chang-
ing the battery
• After changing a fuse
P. 152
Maintenance required
reminder light (vehicles
without a multi-information
display) or message indicat-
ing maintenance is required
(vehicles with a multi-infor-
mation display)*2
• After the maintenance is per-
formed P. 441
Tire pressure warning sys-
tem*1• When rotating the tires.
• When changing the tire size. P. 464
600 9-3. Items to initialize
601
10
For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners........................ 602
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................... 603
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) .............................. 605
Camper information ................... 613
602
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov ;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
603
10
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners
(in French)
●Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière
jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre
entièrement l’épaule; elle ne
doit cependant pas toucher le
cou ni glisser de l’épaule.
●Placez la sangle abdominale de
la ceinture de sécurité le plus
bas possible sur les hanches.
●Réglez la position du dossier du siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus
droit possible et calez-vous bien dans le siège.
●Ne pas vriller la ceinture de sécurité.
■Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d’eau
savonneuse tiède. Par ailleurs, vérifiez régulièrement que les
ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas
exagérément usées.
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité
Entretien et soin
604
ATTENTION
■Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu’elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas
desserrés. Ne pas utiliser une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant
qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n’apporte
aucune garantie de protection de l’occupant contre des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
605
10
For owners
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian
owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag
instructions in English.
606
◆Coussins gonflables SRS frontaux
Coussins gonflables SRS conducteur/passager avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et
du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de
l’habitacle
Coussins gonflables SRS de genoux
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant
◆Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et rideau
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants des
sièges avant
Coussins gonflables SRS rideau
●Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des
occupants assis dans les sièges des places extérieures
●Peuvent empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en
cas de retournement de celui-ci
Composition du système de coussins gonflables SRS
1
2
3
4
607
10
For owners
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS,
dont la conception est basée sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules
automobiles américains (FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique de
coussins gonflables (ECU) utilise les informations reçues des
capteurs, etc., détaillés dans le schéma ci-dessus de composition du
système, pour commander le déploiement des coussins gonflables.
Ces informations comprennent des informations sur la gravité de la
collision et les occupants. Le déploiement rapide des coussins
gonflables est obtenu au moyen d’une réaction chimique dans les
dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant
d’amortir le mouvement des occupants.
Prétensionneurs de ceintures
de sécurité
Coussins gonflables de
genoux
Témoins indicateurs “AIR
BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
Coussin gonflable passager
avant
Coussins gonflables rideau
Coussins gonflables latéraux
(sièges avant)
Système de classification
d’occupant du siège passager
avant (ECU et capteurs)
Témoin d’alerte SRS
Coussin gonflable conducteur
Capteur de position du siège
conducteur
Capteurs d’impact latéral
(arrière)
Capteurs d’impact latéral
(avant)
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité
conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité passager
avant
Capteurs d’impact avant
Boîtier électronique de
coussins gonflables
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
608
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables
SRS.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre.
●Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection
complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
●Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une puissance
considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles,
notamment lorsque le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin
gonflable. Conseils de la National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA):
Sachant que la zone de danger pour le coussin gonflable conducteur se
trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) du déploiement, placez-
vous à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable conducteur pour garantir
une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le
moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de
10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de
plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, tout en continuant à pouvoir
atteindre confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la
plupart des conducteurs peuvent s’asseoir à une distance de 10 in.
(250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé,
simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des
difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un
coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre véhicule
est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela
vous permet d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que
vers la tête et le cou.
Le siège doit être réglé selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-
dessus, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, et la vue
des commandes au tableau de bord.
609
10
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
●Le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une
puissance considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du
coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin
possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce
que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.
●Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures
graves, voire mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis et/ou mal
attachés. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes
pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Toyota recommande vivement
que tous les nourrissons et enfants soient installés dans les sièges arrière
du véhicule et convenablement attachés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs
pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège passager avant.
●N’installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le
siège passager avant, même si le voyant “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé.
En cas d’accident, la force exercée par le déploiement rapide du coussin
gonflable passager peut causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles à un
enfant, si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le
siège passager avant.
●Si vous attachez une rallonge de
ceinture de sécurité aux boucles des
ceintures de sièges avant, mais pas au
pêne de la ceinture de sécurité
proprement dite, les coussins
gonflables SRS frontaux déterminent
que le conducteur et le passager avant
portent leur ceinture de sécurité, alors
même qu’elle n’est pas attachée. Dans
ce cas, les coussins gonflables SRS
frontaux risquent de ne pas se déployer
correctement en cas de collision,
causant des blessures graves, voire
mortelles. Veillez à porter la ceinture de
sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de
sécurité.
610
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
●Ne pas s’asseoir sur le bord du siège et
ne pas s’appuyer contre la planche de
bord.
●Ne laissez pas un enfant debout face
au coussin gonflable SRS passager
avant ni assis sur les genoux d’un
passager avant.
●Ne pas laisser les occupants des sièges
avant voyager avec un objet sur les
genoux.
●Ne pas s’appuyer contre la porte, contre
le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
●Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face
à la portière sur les sièges du passager
ou sortir la tête ou les mains à
l’extérieur du véhicule.
●Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la
planche de bord, la garniture centrale
du volant de direction et la partie
inférieure du tableau de bord.
Lors du déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS conducteur, passager
avant et de genoux, tout objet risque de
se transformer en projectile.
611
10
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
●Ne suspendez aux crochets à vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun objet
dur. En cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS rideau, tous ces
objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures
graves, voire mortelles.
●Si une housse en vinyle recouvre la partie où le coussins gonflable SRS
de genoux se déploie, veillez à l’enlever.
●N’utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d’en
gêner le déploiement. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins
gonflables latéraux de fonctionner correctement, désactiver le dispositif ou
entraîner le déploiement accidentel des coussins latéraux, entraînant la
mort ou des blessures graves.
●Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones
renfermant les composants des coussins gonflables SRS.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins
gonflables SRS.
●Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS
immédiatement après leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être
chauds.
●Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air
frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger.
Retirez tout résidu dès que possible afin d’éviter d’éventuelles irritations
de la peau.
●Ne rien fixer sur les parties telles que
les portes, la vitre de pare-brise, les
vitres latérales, les montants avant et
arrière, les rails latéraux de toit et les
poignées de maintien.
●Ne pas attacher à la clé des objets
lourds, pointus ou très durs, comme
d’autres clés par exemple. Ces objets
risquent d’entraver le déploiement du
coussin gonflable SRS de genoux ou
d’être projetés en direction du siège
conducteur par la force de déploiement,
constituant ainsi un danger potentiel.
612
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
●Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, telles que la
garniture centrale du volant de direction et les garnitures de montants
avant et arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer
par votre concessionnaire Toyota.
●Ne placez aucun objet, par exemple un coussin, sur le siège du passager
avant. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute
la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter normalement
le poids du passager. En conséquence, les coussins gonflables SRS
frontaux du passager avant peuvent ne pas se déployer en cas de
collision.
■Modification et élimination en fin de vie des éléments du système de
coussins gonflables SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez
besoin d’intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l’une des
modifications suivantes. Les coussins gonflables SRS peuvent ne pas
fonctionner correctement ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement,
provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
●Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des coussins gonflables
SRS
●Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit
●Réparation ou modification des ailes avant, du bouclier avant, ou des
flancs de l’habitacle
●Installation d’un équipement de protection sur la calandre (pare-buffle,
pare-kangourou, etc.), d’un chasse-neige, de treuils ou d’une galerie de
toit
●Modification des suspensions du véhicule
●Installation d’appareils électroniques, tels qu’un émetteur/récepteur radio
ou lecteur de CD
●Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une
personne atteinte d’un handicap physique
613
10
For owners
Camper information
C
The figures given in the illustration indicate the recommended center
of gravity zone.
Recommended location for
cargo center of gravity for cargo
weight rating
Rear end of truck bed
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulation
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/
or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on
truck-camper loading. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any
questions you may have as you read this information.
Center of gravity location
1
2
Access Cab models 49.9 in. (1267 mm) 36.1 in. (917 mm)
Double Cab models
With short deck
With long deck
41.1 in. (1045 mm)
41.5 in. (1055 mm)
31.8 in. (807 mm)
27.8 in. (706 mm)
WARNING
■Loading precaution
If a load is too far back, it can cause dangerous handling. If it is too far
forward, the front axle may be overloaded.
614
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load
of the truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the
weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the
manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and
the weight of passengers in the camper.
The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating
and the camper’s center of gravity should fall within the truck’s
recommended center of gravity zone when installed.
Camper center of gravity
Recommended center of
gravity location zone
Cargo weight rating and proper matching
1
2
615
10
For owners
■Cargo weight rating
NO. Engine
Trans
missi
on
Drive Cab Bed Grade
Pass
enge
r
V.C.W
Cargo
Weig
ht
Ratin
g
lbs lbs
12TR6AT
2WD
Access Long SR5 4 1,500 900
2 2TR 6AT Double Short SR5 5 1,400 650
3 2GR 6AT Access Long SR5 4 1,400 800
4 2GR 6AT Double Short SR5 5 1,200 450
5 2GR 6AT Double Short Limited 5 1,250 500
6 2GR 6AT Double Long SR5 5 1,200 450
7 2GR 6AT Double Long Limited 5 1,200 450
82TR5MT
4WD
Access Long SR5 4 1,350 750
9 2TR 6AT Access Long SR5 4 1,300 700
10 2GR 6MT Access Long SR5 4 1,100 500
11 2GR 6AT Access Long SR5 4 1,150 550
12 2GR 6MT Double Short SR5 5 950 200
13 2GR 6AT Double Short SR5 5 1,000 250
14 2GR 6AT Double Short Limited 5 1,000 250
15 2GR 6AT Double Long SR5 5 950 200
16 2GR 6AT Double Long Limited 5 950 200
WARNING
■Overloading
Be careful — overloading can cause dangerous braking and handling
problems, and can damage your vehicle and its tires.
616
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a
scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to
determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These
ratings are given on the vehicle certification label which is located on
the door latch post on the left side of the vehicle. (P. 569) If weight
ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights
below the ratings.
Gross axle weight rating
Front GAWR
Rear GAWR
Gross vehicle weight rating
Not exceed GVWR
Gross axle and vehicle weight ratings
1
2
1
617
10
For owners
■GAWR and GVWR
*:The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P. 5 6 9 )
Model code*GAWR GVWR
Front Rear
Except GRN310L-PRTSHA/
GRN310L-PRTLHA
2910 lb.
(1320 kg) 3280 lb.
(1490 kg)
5600 lb.
(2545 kg)
GRN310L-PRTSHA/
GRN310L-PRTLHA
3040 lb.
(1380 kg)
618
619
Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) .................... 620
Alphabetical index ..................... 624
For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding the multimedia
system.
Audio system types: P. 280
620 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
●If you lose your keys or mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys
can be made by your Toyota dealer. (P. 105)
●If you lose your keys or electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases
significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. (P. 108)
●Is the key battery weak or depleted? (P. 481)
●Vehicles with a smart key system:
Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (P. 191)
●Vehicles with a smart key system:
Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
●The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio
wave. (P. 124)
●Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is
set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector
lock. (P. 113)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting
your Toyota dealer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
The rear door cannot be opened (Double Cab models only)
621
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
●Vehicles with an automatic transmission:
Is the shift lever in P? (P. 187)
●Vehicles with a manual transmission:
Do you turn the key with the clutch pedal depressed firmly? (P. 187)
●Is the battery discharged? (P. 557)
●Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?
(P. 190)
●Is the shift lever in P? (P. 192)
●Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (P. 122)
●Is the steering wheel unlocked? (P. 192)
●Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (P. 555)
●Is the battery discharged? (P. 557)
●Vehicles without a smart key system:
Is the engine switch in the “ON” position?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in the “ON” position. (P. 553)
●Vehicles with a smart key system:
Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in IGNITION ON mode. (P. 553)
If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
(vehicles without a smart key system)
The engine does not start
(vehicles with a smart key system)
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress
the brake pedal (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
622 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
●Vehicles without a smart key system:
It is locked to prevent theft of the vehicle if the key is removed from the
engine switch. (P. 188)
●Vehicles with a smart key system:
It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (P. 192)
●Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be oper-
ated if the window lock switch is pressed. (P. 145)
●The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of
time. (P. 192)
●The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? (P. 512)
●The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (P. 202)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.
(P. 512, 525)
●Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
Check the message on the multi-information display. (P. 519)
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is
stopped
The windows do not open or close by operating the power
window switches
The engine switch is turned off automatically
(vehicles with a smart key system)
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
(vehicles with a smart key system)
623
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
●Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (P. 78)
●Vehicles without a smart key system:
To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position or start the
engine.
●Vehicles with a smart key system:
To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode or start
the engine.
●When a warning light turns on, refer to P. 519.
●When a warning light turns on or a warning message or indicator is dis-
played, refer to P. 510, 519.
●Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
(P. 536)
●Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or
snow. (P. 563)
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
(vehicles with an alarm)
A warning light turns on
(vehicles without a multi-information display)
A warning light turns on or a warning message or indicator
is displayed (vehicles with a multi-information display)
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes stuck
624 Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C .................................... 370, 376
Air conditioning filter ............. 478
Automatic air conditioning
system................................ 376
Manual air conditioning
system................................ 370
ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) .................................. 264
Function ................................ 264
Warning light......................... 511
Warning message................. 521
Active head restraints ............. 129
Active traction control ............ 253
Air conditioning filter .............. 478
Air conditioning
system............................ 370, 376
Air conditioning filter ............. 478
Automatic air conditioning
system................................ 376
Manual air conditioning
system................................ 370
Airbags ....................................... 34
Airbag operating conditions .... 41
Airbag precautions
for your child......................... 37
Airbag warning light .............. 510
Correct driving posture ........... 26
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions ............. 41
Curtain shield airbag
precautions........................... 38
Front passenger occupant
classification system............. 45
General airbag precautions .... 37
Locations of airbags................34
Modification and disposal
of airbags.............................. 40
Side airbag operating
conditions ............................. 41
Side airbag precautions..........38
Side and curtain shield
airbags operating
conditions ............................. 41
Side and curtain shield
airbags precautions.............. 38
SRS airbags ........................... 34
Alarm
Alarm ...................................... 78
Warning buzzer ............ 510, 519
Anchor brackets........................ 55
Antennas
(smart key system) ............... 121
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) ...................................... 264
Function................................ 264
Warning light......................... 511
Warning message................. 521
Assist grips.............................. 419
Audio input*............................ 285
Audio remote control
switches*............................... 284
Audio system*......................... 280
Antenna ................................ 299
Audio input............................ 285
Audio settings....................... 291
AUX port/USB port ............... 285
Bluetooth® audio .................. 328
CD player.............................. 300
Display settings .................... 292
General settings ................... 289
iPod ...................................... 305
MP3/WMA disc ..................... 300
Portable music player........... 313
Radio .................................... 298
Setup menu .......................... 288
USB memory ........................ 309
AUTO LSD system................... 248
Automatic light control
system.................................... 203
A
625
Alphabetical index
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission......... 195
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 553
S mode ................................. 197
Power mode switch...............196
AUX port ................................... 285
Auxiliary boxes ........................ 397
Back window............................ 148
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs.............495
Wattage ................................ 578
Battery ...................................... 459
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.......................... 557
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 270
Warning light......................... 510
Warning message................. 520
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) ....... 236
Bluetooth®*
Audio system ........................ 328
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ............. 329
Bottle holders .......................... 392
Brake
Fluid...................................... 456
Parking brake........................ 202
Warning buzzer..................... 510
Warning light......................... 510
Warning message................. 519
Brake assist ............................. 264
Break-in tips............................. 156
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control................................... 90
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)....... 236
Blind Spot Monitor
function............................... 238
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
function............................... 241
Camera mounting bracket...... 420
Camper information ................ 613
Care .................................. 434, 437
Aluminum wheels ................. 434
Exterior ................................. 434
Interior .................................. 437
Seat belts.............................. 438
Cargo capacity......................... 167
Cargo lamp
Light switch........................... 387
Replacing light bulbs ............ 497
CD player*............................... 300
Certification label .................... 569
Chains ...................................... 271
Child restraint system............... 51
Booster seats, definition ......... 52
Booster seats, installation....... 62
Convertible seats, definition ... 52
Convertible seats,
installation ...................... 60, 61
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............ 45
Infant seats, definition............. 52
Infant seats, installation .......... 60
Installing CRS
with LATCH anchors ...... 58, 59
Installing CRS with seat
belts...................................... 60
Installing CRS
with top tether strap........ 63, 65
B
C
*: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
626 Alphabetical index
Child safety ................................ 50
Airbag precautions.................. 37
Battery precautions............... 560
Child restraint system ............. 51
How your child should
wear the seat belt................. 30
Installing child restraints ......... 55
Moon roof precautions.......... 152
Power window lock switch .... 145
Power window precautions... 147
Rear door child-protector...... 113
Removed wireless remote
control/electronic key
battery precautions............. 483
Seat belt extender
precautions........................... 33
Seat belt precautions.............. 54
Seat heater precautions........ 383
Child-protectors....................... 113
Cleaning ........................... 434, 437
Aluminum wheels.................. 434
Exterior ................................. 434
Interior................................... 437
Seat belts.............................. 438
Clock*....................................... 407
Compass .................................. 428
Condenser................................ 456
Console box............................. 390
Consumption screen........... 94, 98
Cooling system........................ 454
Capacity................................ 573
Checking............................... 454
Engine overheating............... 561
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 270
Crawl Control ........................... 259
CRS ............................................. 51
Cruise control .......................... 215
Cup holders.............................. 391
Curtain shield airbags............... 35
Customizable features ............ 592
Daytime running light
system.................................... 205
Deck hooks .............................. 399
Defogger
Outside rear view
mirrors ........................ 372, 379
Windshield .................... 372, 379
Differential................................ 574
Dimensions .............................. 566
Dinghy towing.......................... 186
Display
Drive information .................... 94
Multi-information display......... 93
Warning message................. 519
Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 446
Door lock
Doors.................................... 109
Key ....................................... 109
Smart key system ................. 110
Wireless remote control........ 109
Doors ........................................ 109
Automatic door locking
and unlocking system......... 113
Door lock .............................. 111
Door windows....................... 145
Open door warning light ....... 512
Open door warning
message............................. 524
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 143
Rear door child-protector...... 113
Driving ...................................... 154
Break-in tips.......................... 156
Correct driving posture ........... 26
Driving assist system............ 264
Procedures ........................... 154
Winter drive tips.................... 270
D
627
Alphabetical index
EDR (Event data recorder)........ 10
Electronic key .......................... 102
Battery-saving function ......... 123
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ........... 555
Replacing the battery............ 481
Emergency, in case of
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ........... 555
If the engine will not start...... 551
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P .... 553
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.......................... 557
If the warning buzzer
sounds................................ 510
If the warning light turns
on ....................................... 510
If the warning message
is displayed......................... 519
If you have a flat tire ............. 536
If you think something
is wrong.............................. 508
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 563
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency... 501
If your vehicle needs
to be towed......................... 503
If your vehicle overheats....... 561
Emergency flashers ................ 500
Engine
Compartment........................ 450
Engine switch ............... 187, 190
Hood..................................... 448
How to start the
engine ........................ 187, 190
Identification number ............ 569
If the engine will not start...... 551
Ignition switch
(engine switch)........... 187, 190
Immobilizer system................. 69
Overheating.......................... 561
Engine coolant......................... 454
Capacity................................ 573
Checking............................... 454
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 270
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ....................................... 88
Engine immobilizer system ...... 69
Engine oil ................................. 452
Capacity................................ 571
Checking............................... 452
Oil level warning light............ 514
Oil level warning message.... 522
Oil pressure warning light..... 510
Oil pressure warning
message............................. 520
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 270
Engine switch
(ignition switch) ............ 187, 190
Engine switch light
(ignition switch light)............ 385
Event data recorder (EDR)........ 10
E
*: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
628 Alphabetical index
Flat tire...................................... 536
Floor mats .................................. 24
Fluid
Automatic transmission......... 575
Brake .................................... 576
Power steering...................... 576
Washer ................................. 461
Fog lights ................................. 207
Replacing light bulbs.............493
Switch ................................... 207
Wattage ................................ 578
Four-wheel drive system ........ 244
Front passenger occupant
classification system .............. 45
Front personal lights............... 386
Front seats ............................... 129
Adjustment............................ 129
Cleaning................................ 437
Correct driving posture ........... 26
Head restraints ..................... 134
Seat heaters ......................... 383
Front side marker lights
Light switch ........................... 203
Replacing light bulbs.............491
Wattage ................................ 578
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............492
Turn signal lever ................... 201
Wattage ................................ 578
Fuel ........................................... 570
Capacity................................ 570
Fuel gauge..............................88
Fuel pump shut off system.... 509
Information............................ 579
Refueling............................... 211
Type...................................... 570
Warning light......................... 512
Warning message................. 523
Fuel consumption
Average fuel
consumption................... 94, 98
Current fuel
consumption................... 94, 98
Fuel filler door ......................... 213
Fuel pump shut off system..... 509
Fuses ........................................ 484
Garage door opener ................ 421
Gas station information .......... 640
Gauges ....................................... 88
Glove box ................................. 389
Grocery bag hooks.................. 404
F
G
629
Alphabetical index
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)*..... 314, 329
Head restraints ........................ 134
Headlights ................................ 203
Light switch ........................... 203
Replacing light bulbs..... 489, 490
Wattage ................................ 578
Heaters
Automatic air conditioning
system................................ 376
Manual air conditioning
system................................ 370
Seat heaters ......................... 383
Outside rear view
mirrors ........................ 372, 379
High mounted stoplight
Replacing.............................. 497
Wattage ................................ 578
Hill-start assist control............ 265
Hood ......................................... 448
Hooks
Deck hooks........................... 399
Grocery bag hooks ............... 404
Retaining hooks (floor mat)..... 24
Horn .......................................... 138
I/M test ...................................... 445
Identification
Engine .................................. 569
Tire ....................................... 583
Vehicle.................................. 569
Ignition switch
(engine switch).............. 187, 190
Ignition switch light
(engine switch light) ............. 385
Illuminated entry system ........ 387
Immobilizer system................... 69
Indicators ................................... 85
Initialization
Maintenance......................... 441
Moon roof ............................. 152
Tire pressure
warning system .................. 464
Inside rear view mirror............ 140
Instrument panel light
control...................................... 90
Interior lights ........................... 385
Personal lights...................... 386
Switches ............................... 386
Wattage ................................ 578
Intuitive parking assist ........... 220
Function................................ 220
Warning message......... 525, 525
H
I
*: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
630 Alphabetical index
Jack
Positioning the jack............... 543
Vehicle-equipped jack........... 537
Jack handle.............................. 541
Jam protection function
Moon roof.............................. 150
Power windows.....................146
Keyless entry
Smart key system ................. 110
Wireless remote control........ 109
Keys .......................................... 102
Battery-saving function ......... 123
Electronic key ....................... 102
Engine switch................ 187, 190
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ................. 555
If you lose your keys............. 105
Ignition switch ............... 187, 190
Key number plate.................. 102
Keyless entry ........................ 109
Mechanical key..................... 104
Replacing the battery............ 481
Warning buzzer..................... 122
Wireless remote control........ 109
Knee airbags.............................. 35
Language
(multi-information display)..... 95
LATCH anchors ................... 58, 59
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever.............. 448
Hood lock release lever........ 448
Shift lever...................... 195, 199
Tilt and telescopic steering
lock release lever ............... 138
Turn signal lever................... 201
Wiper lever ........................... 208
License plate lights
Light switch........................... 203
Replacing light bulbs ............ 496
Wattage ................................ 578
Light bulbs
Replacing.............................. 487
Wattage ................................ 578
Lights
Cargo lamp switch ................ 387
Center tray light .................... 385
Engine switch light
(ignition switch light)........... 385
Fog light switch..................... 207
Headlight switch ................... 203
Illuminated entry system....... 387
Interior lights......................... 386
Interior lights list.................... 385
Personal lights...................... 386
Replacing light bulbs ............ 487
Turn signal lever................... 201
Vanity lights .......................... 406
Wattage ................................ 578
Load capacity .......................... 167
Lock steering column ............. 138
Luggage compartment
features .................................. 396
Luggage storage box .............. 393
J
K
L
631
Alphabetical index
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance... 446
General maintenance ...........442
Maintenance data ................. 566
Maintenance requirements ... 440
Resetting the maintenance
required remainder light
or message........................441
Malfunction indicator lamp..... 510
Manual air conditioning
system.................................... 370
Manual transmission............... 199
Master warning light........ 513, 519
Meter
Indicators ................................ 85
Instrument panel light
control................................... 90
Meters..................................... 88
Multi-information display ......... 93
Warning lights......................... 83
Warning message................. 519
Meter control switches.............. 94
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .......... 140
Outside rear view
mirror defoggers......... 372, 379
Outside rear view mirrors...... 143
Vanity mirrors........................ 406
Moon roof ................................. 149
Jam protection function......... 150
Operation .............................. 149
MP3 disc*................................. 300
Multi-information display.......... 93
Customizing vehicle
features ................................ 95
Driving information.................. 94
Navigation system-linked........ 93
Settings display ...................... 95
Switching the display.............. 94
Warning message................. 519
Multi Terrain ABS .................... 264
Multi-terrain Select .................. 255
Navigation system*
Noise from under vehicle ........... 8
Odometer ................................... 88
Off-road precautions............... 273
Oil
Engine oil.............................. 571
Differential oil........................ 574
Manual transmission oil........ 575
Transfer oil............................ 576
Opener
Hood..................................... 448
Outside rear view mirrors....... 143
Adjusting and folding ............ 143
Blind spot monitor................. 236
Outside rear view
mirror defoggers......... 372, 379
Outside temperature
display...................................... 88
Overhead console ................... 390
Overheating ............................. 561
M
N
O
*: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
632 Alphabetical index
Parking assist sensors
(intuitive parking assist)....... 220
Parking brake........................... 202
Operation .............................. 202
Parking brake engaged
warning buzzer ................... 512
Parking brake engaged
warning message ............... 525
Parking lights........................... 203
Light switch ........................... 203
Replacing light bulbs..... 492, 497
Wattage ................................ 578
Personal lights......................... 386
Wattage ................................ 578
Power mode switch ................. 196
Power outlets ................... 408, 409
Power steering fluid ................ 457
Power windows........................ 145
Jam protection function......... 146
Operation .............................. 145
Window lock switch............... 145
Radiator.................................... 456
Radio*...................................... 298
Rear differential
lock system ........................... 250
Rear seat
Adjustment precautions........ 133
Child seats/child restraint
system installation................ 55
Cleaning ............................... 437
Folding down ........................ 131
Head restraints ..................... 134
Raising the bottom
cushion............................... 131
Rear side marker lights........... 203
Light switch........................... 203
Replacing light bulbs ............ 495
Wattage ................................ 578
Rear step bumper.................... 120
Rear turn signal lights ............ 201
Replacing light bulbs ............ 495
Turn signal lever................... 201
Wattage ................................ 578
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror .......... 140
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 143
Rear view monitor system...... 226
Refueling .................................. 211
Capacity................................ 570
Fuel types............................. 570
Opening the fuel tank cap..... 213
P
R
633
Alphabetical index
Replacing
Electronic key battery ........... 481
Fuses.................................... 484
Light bulbs ............................ 487
Tires...................................... 536
Wireless remote control
battery ................................ 481
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners...................... 602
Resetting the remainder light
or message indicating
maintenance is required....... 441
Seat belt reminder light........... 512
Seat belts.................................... 28
Adjusting the seat belt ............ 29
Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) .................... 30
Child restraint system
installation ............................ 55
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belt........................ 438
Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR) .................... 30
How to wear your seat belt ..... 28
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................... 30
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use......................... 31
Reminder light and buzzer.... 512
Seat belt extender................... 30
Seat belt pretensioners........... 29
SRS warning light ................. 510
Seat heaters ............................. 383
Seating capacity ...................... 167
Seats, Front.............................. 129
Adjustment............................ 129
Adjustment precautions........ 130
Cleaning ............................... 437
Head restraints ..................... 134
Properly sitting in the seat ...... 26
Seat heaters ......................... 383
Seats, Rear............................... 131
Adjustment precautions........ 133
Child seats/child restraint
system installation................ 55
Cleaning ............................... 437
Folding down ........................ 131
Head restraints ..................... 134
Raising the bottom
cushion............................... 131
Sensor
Automatic headlight
system................................ 205
Inside rear view mirror .......... 142
Intuitive parking assist .......... 220
Shift lever ......................... 195, 199
Automatic transmission ........ 195
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P .... 553
Manual transmission............. 199
S mode ................................. 197
Shift lock system..................... 553
Side airbags ............................... 35
S
*: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
634 Alphabetical index
Side marker lights ................... 203
Light switch ........................... 203
Replacing light bulbs..... 491, 495
Wattage ................................ 578
Side mirrors ............................. 143
Adjusting and folding ............ 143
BSM (Blind spot monitor)...... 236
Side turn signal lights ............. 201
Replacing light bulbs.............497
Turn signal lever ................... 201
Smart key system .................... 121
Antenna location................... 121
Entry functions ...................... 110
Starting the engine................ 190
Warning message................. 530
Snow tires ................................ 272
Spare tire .................................. 536
Inflation pressure .................. 577
Replacing.............................. 536
Storage location....................537
Spark plug ................................ 573
Specifications .......................... 566
Speech command system*.... 363
Speedometer.............................. 88
Steering
Column lock release ..... 188, 192
Warning message................. 533
Steering wheel
Adjustment.................... 138, 138
Audio remote control
switches*........................... 284
Meter control switches............ 94
Steering wheel audio
switches*............................... 284
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 495
Wattage ................................ 578
Storage box.............................. 393
Storage feature ........................ 388
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 563
Sun visors ................................ 406
Switches
Active traction control
switch ................................. 253
Audio remote control
switches*........................... 284
BSM (Blind spot monitor)
main switch ........................ 236
Cargo lamp main switch ....... 387
“CLUTCH START
CANCEL” switch ................ 263
Crawl Control switch............. 259
Cruise control switch ............ 215
Door lock switches................ 111
Emergency flashers switch... 500
Engine switch ............... 187, 190
Fog light switch..................... 207
Front-wheel drive control
switch ................................. 244
Garage door opener
switches ............................. 421
635
Alphabetical index
Headlight switch.................... 203
Ignition switch ............... 187, 190
Intuitive parking assist .......... 220
Light switches ....................... 203
Moon roof switches............... 149
Multi-terrain Select
switches.............................. 255
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers switch ........ 372, 379
Outside rear view mirror
switches.............................. 143
Power door lock switch......... 111
Power mode switch...............196
Power outlet main switch ...... 409
Power window switches........ 145
Rear differential lock
switch ................................. 250
Seat heater switches ............383
Talk switch*.......................... 363
Telephone switches*............ 342
Tire pressure warning
reset switch ........................ 464
Turn signal lights................... 201
VSC off switch ...... 248, 265, 266
Window lock switch............... 145
Windshield wipers
and washer switch.............. 208
Wireless charger switch........ 414
Tachometer ................................ 88
Tail lights.................................. 203
Light switch........................... 203
Replacing light bulbs ............ 495
Wattage ................................ 578
Tailgate
Removing the tailgate........... 117
Tailgate................................. 116
Talk switch*............................. 363
Telephone switches*.............. 342
Theft deterrent system
Alarm ...................................... 78
Engine immobilizer system..... 69
Tire inflation pressure............. 472
Maintenance data................. 577
Warning light......................... 513
Warning message......... 521, 523
Tire information ....................... 582
Glossary ............................... 587
Size....................................... 583
Tire identification number ..... 583
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading .............................. 585
Tire pressure warning
system.................................... 463
Initializing.............................. 464
Installing tire pressure
warning valves and
transmitters ........................ 463
Registering ID codes ............ 465
Tire pressure warning reset
switch ................................. 464
Warning light......................... 513
Warning message......... 521, 523
T
*: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
636 Alphabetical index
Tires .......................................... 462
Chains................................... 271
Checking............................... 462
If you have a flat tire ............. 536
Inflation pressure .................. 577
Information............................ 582
Replacing.............................. 536
Rotating tires......................... 462
Size....................................... 577
Snow tires ............................. 272
Spare tire .............................. 537
Tire pressure warning
system................................ 463
Warning light......................... 513
Warning message......... 521, 523
Tonneau cover ......................... 400
Tools ......................................... 537
Top tether strap ................... 63, 65
Total load capacity .......... 167, 567
Towing
Bumper towing...................... 176
Dinghy towing ....................... 186
Emergency towing ................ 505
Trailer towing ........................ 168
TRAC (Traction Control) ......... 264
Transmission ........................... 195
Automatic transmission......... 195
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 553
Manual transmission.............199
Power mode switch...............196
S mode ................................. 197
Trip meters ................................. 88
Turn signal lights..................... 201
Replacing light
bulbs................... 492, 495, 497
Turn signal lever ................... 201
Wattage ................................ 578
USB port*................................. 285
Vanity lights
Vanity lights .......................... 406
Wattage ................................ 578
Vanity mirrors .......................... 406
Vehicle data recordings.............. 9
Vehicle identification
number................................... 569
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) ...................................... 264
Voice command system*....... 363
VSC
(Vehicle Stability Control) .... 264
U
V
637
Alphabetical index
Warning buzzers
Brake Override
System ....................... 513, 522
Brake system................ 510, 519
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ..... 236
Crawl Control ........................ 261
Downshifting ......................... 198
Four-wheel drive control ....... 244
Intuitive parking assist .......... 221
Key reminder ........................ 188
Light reminder....................... 206
Open door..................... 512, 524
Open moon roof............ 151, 527
Parking brake................ 512, 525
Reverse warning................... 200
Seat belt reminder ................ 512
Warning lights ........................... 83
ABS ...................................... 511
Automatic transmission ........ 511
Brake Override System ........ 513
Brake system........................ 510
BSM...................................... 513
Charging system................... 510
Cruise control ....................... 511
Four-wheel drive indicator
light..................................... 512
Low engine oil level .............. 514
Low engine oil pressure........ 510
Low fuel level........................ 512
Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator..................... 512
Low windshield
washer fluid ........................ 513
Maintenance required
reminder light ..................... 514
Malfunction indicator lamp.... 510
Master warning light ............. 513
Open door............................. 512
Parking brake indicator......... 512
Rear differential lock
indicator light...................... 512
Seat belt reminder light......... 512
Slip indicator......................... 511
SRS ...................................... 510
Tire pressure ........................ 513
W
*: For vehicles with Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
638 Alphabetical index
Warning messages.................. 519
Washer...................................... 208
Checking............................... 461
Low windshield washer fluid
warning light ...................... 513
Low windshield washer fluid
warning message ............... 523
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 270
Switch ................................... 208
Washing and waxing ............... 434
Weight
Cargo capacity...................... 167
Cargo weight rating............... 615
Gross axle weight rating ....... 617
Gross combination
weight rating....................... 172
Gross vehicle weight
rating .................................. 617
Load limits............................. 167
Towing capacity............167, 172
Trailer Weight
Rating......................... 167, 172
TWR.............................. 167, 172
Vehicle capacity
weight......................... 167, 567
Wheels
Replacing wheels.................. 475
Size....................................... 577
Window lock switch ................ 145
Windows................................... 145
Back window......................... 148
Power windows.....................145
Windshield wipers ................... 208
Winter driving tips ................... 270
Wireless charger...................... 414
Wireless remote control key
Locking/Unlocking................. 109
Replacing the battery............ 481
WMA disc ................................. 300
639
Alphabetical index
640
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever Fuel filler door
P. 448 P. 213
Hood lock release
lever Tire inflation pressure
P. 448 P. 577
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 21.1 gal. (80.0 L, 17.6 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type P. 570, 579
Cold tire inflation pressure P. 577
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill — reference) P. 5 7 1
Engine oil type P. 571

Navigation menu